FIELD INSTRUCTIONS
FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF
COASTAL ALASKA
2005
Forest Inventory and Analysis Program
Pacific Northwest Research Station
USDA Forest Service
i
Summary of Major Changes from 2004 Field Guide
INTRODUCTION
SAFETY
•
No significant changes
•
New chapter
LOCATING THE PLOT
• New section describing proper formatting of photo work
PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
• New section that outlines specific monumentation procedures on plots
falling in National Forest Wilderness.
• New section that explains everything that must be filled out on the plot
location record prior to turning in the plot folder as “done”.
PLOT LEVEL DATA
CONDITION CLASS
•
No significant changes
•
New rules on forested conditions bisected by roads or cultural
conditions (a.k.a. road as a stopper rule).
STAND AGE variable added
•
SUBPLOT INFORMATION
• Clarifications and examples for certain situations encountered when
subplot centers may or may not be safe to occupy (starting on page 76)
• Added “Invasive Species” section (starts on page 82)
TREE AND SAPLING DATA
• Changes in PRESENT TREE STATUS, modified and added values and
changed some of the witness selection methodology.
• Witness tally trees will be tagged with a “w” not “*”
• Added RECONCILE value of 9
• LENGTH METHOD will be a separate variable/field and will not be
directly attached to ACTUAL LENGTH field.
• Note and figures on properly measuring distance and azimuth to pistol
butt/krummholz trees.
• STANDING DEAD will be required for all dead trees regardless of
SAMPLE KIND (last year only required on SAMPLE KIND = 2).
SITE TREES
•
•
Various minor changes throughout the General Instructions section.
Added value (“I” - Invalid) to Item 3 site/age tree status.
VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
• New chapter
ii
COORDINATES (GPS)
• No significant changes
LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS
• No significant changes
APPENDICES
•
Added radio repeater map for Chugach NF
iii
FIELD INSTRUCTIONS
FOR THE ANNUAL INVENTORY OF
COASTAL ALASKA
2005
Based on version 2.0 of the National CORE Field Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I.
INTRODUCTION…………………………………………………………………..1
II.
SAFETY…………………………………………………………………………….5
III.
LOCATING THE PLOT…………………………………………………………...10
IV.
PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING…………………………………………18
V.
PLOT LEVEL DATA………………………………………………………………27
VI.
CONDITION CLASS………………………………………………………………46
VII.
SUBPLOT INFORMATION………………………………………………………75
VIII.
TREE AND SAPLING DATA…………………………………………………….96
IX.
SITE TREES……………………………………………………………………….123
X.
VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS………..…………….131
XI.
COORDINATES (GPS)………………………………………………….………..146
XII.
LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS……………………………………………………154
XIII.
APPENDICES…………………………………………………………………......157
NOTE: In Microsoft Word select Tools>Options>View>Hidden Text to see hidden notes throughout this document
iv
Annual Inventory 2005
I. INTRODUCTION
I. INTRODUCTION
This field guide documents the procedures by the Forest Inventory and Analysis Program (FIA)
in the 2005 annual inventory of coastal Alaska.
FIA, a program within the Pacific Northwest Research Station (PNW), USDA Forest Service, is
one of five Forest Inventory and Analysis work units across the United States. PNW-FIA is
responsible for inventorying the forest resources of Alaska, California, Hawaii, Oregon, Pacific
Islands, and Washington.
Purposes of this field guide
This field guide serves two purposes, to:
•
Instruct field personnel in how to locate and measure field plots in the 2005 annual inventory
of coastal Alaska.
•
Document the field procedures, methods, and codes used in the 2005 field inventory.
Organization of this field guide
This field guide is structured primarily for use by field personnel. Each chapter corresponds
either to a separate function that must be performed in locating and measuring a field plot, or to
a particular aspect of data recording that must be completed.
The procedures in this field guide are ordered to coincide as much as possible with the order in
which field data items are collected and entered into the field data recorder. Some procedures
and codes are repeated in multiple chapters of the field guide to minimize the need to refer to
additional chapters while collecting data in the standard order.
This field guide incorporates the field data collection procedures of the Forest Inventory and
Analysis National CORE Field Guide. Instructions in shaded text, and data items in all capital
letters describe data items or field procedures that are a part of (or similarly related to) that
guide. Several of those items are still under development, or have unresolved issues at the time
of this printing. Temporary regional adjustments and clarifications are noted in italic font within
the shaded text. Portions of this field guide which are not shaded are regional variables or
procedures which supplement the national core data.
Information that is infrequently used or that is included only for documentation, as well as a
glossary of terms, is included in the appendices at the end of this field guide.
Products
PNW-FIA provides information needed by resource planners, policy analysts, and others
involved in forest resource decision-making. Data collected in PNW-FIA inventories is
summarized, interpreted, analyzed, and published in statistical and analytical reports of national,
state, and sub regional scope. PNW-FIA publishes information on area by forest land and
owner classes and by degree of urbanization; land use change; timber volume, growth,
mortality, and removals; potential forest productivity; opportunities for silvicultural treatment; and
associations for wildlife habitat. PNW-FIA also provides data to answer questions about forest
resources.
1
Annual Inventory 2005
I. INTRODUCTION
Research topics
The data collected in these inventories represent a wealth of information for both applied and
basic questions concerning forest ecosystems. Topics include: the distribution of plant species
and their relationship to environment, the incidence of insects and disease in relation to forest
type and condition, changes in forest structure in productivity due to disturbance, and improved
prediction of forest growth and development on different sites and in response to management.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The CORE field plot consists of four subplots approximately 1/24 acre in size with a radius of
24.0 feet. The center subplot is subplot 1. Subplots 2, 3, and 4 are located 120.0 feet
horizontal (+/- 7 feet) at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees, respectively, from the center of
subplot 1 (see figure below). Subplots are used to collect data on trees with a diameter (at
breast height "DBH") of 5.0 inches or greater. Throughout this field guide, use of the word
“'plot” refers to the entire set of four subplots. “Plot center” is defined as the center of subplot 1.
Each subplot contains a microplot of approximately 1/300 acre in size with a radius of 6.8 feet.
The center of the microplot is offset 90 degrees and 12.0 feet horizontal (+/- 1 foot) from each
subplot center. Microplots are numbered in the same way as subplots. Microplots are used to
select and collect data on saplings (DBH of 1.0 inch through 4.9 inches) and seedlings [DBH
less than 1.0 inch in diameter and greater than 0.5 foot in length (conifers) or greater than 1.0
foot in length (hardwoods)].
2
Annual Inventory 2005
I. INTRODUCTION
From
Subplot 1
Subplot 1
Subplot 1
Subplot 2
Subplot 2
Subplot 3
To
Subplot 2
Subplot 3
Subplot 4
Subplot 3
Subplot 4
Subplot 4
Horiz. Dist.
120.0 ft.
120.0 ft.
120.0 ft.
207.8 ft.
207.8 ft.
207.8 ft.
Azimuth
360
120
240
150
210
270
UNITS OF MEASURE
The field guide will use ENGLISH units as the measurement system.
All azimuths will be magnetic (no declination)
Plot Dimensions:
Subplot - for selecting trees with diameter ≥ 5.0 inches
Radius = 24.0 feet
Area = 1,809.56 square feet or approximately 0.04 acre or approximately 1/24 acre
Microplot - for counting seedlings and selecting saplings
Radius = 6.8 feet
Area = 145.27 square feet or approximately 0.003 acre or approximately 1/300 acre
The distance between subplot centers is 120.0 feet horizontal.
The minimum area needed to qualify as accessible forest land is 1.0 acre.
The minimum width to qualify as accessible forest land is 120.0 feet.
Tree Limiting Dimensions:
Breast height
Stump height
Merchantable top
Minimum conifer seedling length
Minimum hardwood seedling length
Seedling/sapling DBH break
Sapling/tree DBH break
4.5 feet
1.0 foot
4.0 inches DOB
0.5 foot
1.0 foot
1.0 inch DOB
5.0 inch DOB
Data are collected on field plots at the following levels:
Plot
Data that describe the entire cluster of four subplots.
Subplot
Data that describe a single subplot of a cluster.
Condition Class A discrete combination of landscape attributes that describe the
environment on all or part of the plot. These attributes include
3
Annual Inventory 2005
I. INTRODUCTION
Boundary
CONDITION CLASS STATUS, RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP,
FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION STATUS, and
TREE DENSITY.
An approximate description of the demarcation line between two
condition classes that occur on a single subplot or microplot plot. There is
no boundary recorded when the demarcation occurs beyond the fixed
radius plots.
Tree
Data describing saplings with a diameter 1.0 inch through 4.9 inches, and
trees with diameter greater than or equal to 5.0 inches
Seedling
Data describing trees with a diameter less than 1.0 inch and greater than
or equal to 0.5 foot in length (conifers) or greater than or equal to 1.0 foot
in length (hardwoods).
Site Tree
Data describing site index trees
NOTES:
4
Annual Inventory 2005
II. SAFETY
II. SAFETY
Safety is a number one priority within the FIA program. In the field there are many safety
hazards. Everyone must always be conscious of these hazards to avoid accidents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Don’t take chances!
Eliminate horseplay and carelessness!
Think Safety!
No task is more important than personal safety!
Always make sure that someone else knows where you plan to work each day!
Safety in the Woods
Wear protective clothing. HARDHATS (mandatory!), long-sleeved shirts, long pants, and
gloves may protect you from with brush, devils club, cow parsnip, rocks, and stinging insects.
Firearm safety. Inspect your firearm every day before heading out into the field. Take the time
to keep your assigned firearm well maintained and clean. Only employees certified in firearm
safety will be allowed to carry and operate them. Notify all crewmembers on the status of the
firearm whenever it is loaded, unloaded, etc. Point the muzzle in a safe direction at all times,
remember treat every firearm encountered as if it is loaded and ready to fire. Keep extra
ammunition dry and put it in an “easy to access” location. Keep fingers and branches away from
the trigger guard and keep the action area as clean as possible.
Walk, don’t run in the woods. Take your time and plan your route. Avoid plunging through the
brush. The best route of travel may not be the shortest. Routes across brushy irregular terrain
with rocks and down logs can be hazardous.
Be watchful of twigs and branches, which may cause eye injury. Keep a sufficient distance
behind the person ahead of you to avoid being slapped by branches. Safety glasses will reduce
the chance of eye injury.
Be sure that your general whereabouts are known by others. Radio or cell phone contact
may not be possible. Keep communication device batteries “topped” off (satellite, radio, etc.).
Wear good quality boots that provide good support and traction. Cork boots are provided for
you and are recommended for much of the terrain.
When contouring a steep slope, do not lean into the hill. This tends to loosen footing. Erect
posture or slightly leaning out gives more secure footing.
Carry plenty of water. Don’t expect your partner to carry it for you.
Bee Aware. Keep an eye out for yellow jacket and hornet activity. Yellow jackets nest in the
ground, often in well decayed logs or in thick moss on trees or in snag cavities. Hornets nest
above ground in “paper” nests that are suspended from branches. If allergic to insect stings
carry medication to counteract the effects of stings. Let your co-workers know about your
allergies and how they can assist in an emergency.
5
Annual Inventory 2005
II. SAFETY
Safety in and around the Helicopter
Wear Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Nomex flight suit, Nomex or leather gloves,
leather boots, eye and ear protection, flight helmet, and no synthetic clothing under flight suit.
Approach/Depart helicopter from the downhill side. Also after pilot gives the signal (thumbs
up, nod, etc.) approach/depart from the side or front in a crouching position in full view of the
pilot.
Help the pilot watch for hazards. Hazards such as other aircraft, power lines, birds,
deteriorating weather, and fumes should be reported to the pilot.
Don’t go beyond cargo racks or skids. Stay away from the rear of the helicopter, regardless
of whether the blades are in motion or not.
Keep cockpit chatter to a minimum during takeoff and landing. The pilot will be in contact
with air traffic control or something similar during this time. He also doesn’t need any
distractions while taking off/landing.
Tell the pilot if you feel the conditions are unsafe. Any Forest Service passenger has the
authority and responsibility to stop any aviation operation when conditions indicate to them
further activity would jeopardize safety.
Hazardous Materials on the helicopter. Make sure that bear spray devices are put into the
approved airtight container in the rear cargo area prior to flight. If, in mid-flight, you remember
that you didn’t put the bear spray away properly, let the pilot know so that you can land and put
it away correctly. Make sure the firearm is completely downloaded and make sure all ammo is in
the rear cargo area in a pack or plastic ammo container.
Safety on the Road
It all pays the same, so drive with care, with courtesy, regardless of others’ actions, and with
common sense.
Seat belt use is required in all government owned, leased, and rented vehicles.
Drive Defensively! Expect the other person, whether a vehicle operator or a pedestrian to do
the worst thing and be prepared.
Do not drive when sleepy, taking medications, or when other personal conditions make it
unsafe to drive a vehicle. Get someone else to drive or, if alone, stop driving and nap (out of
public view).
Always drive with your headlights on. This practice increases the visibility of the vehicle. It
is particularly important when driving in fog, on dusty roads, traveling in and out of shadows, and
any other low light/visibility situations.
Do not operate vehicle in unsafe conditions. Check your vehicle frequently to keep it in good
mechanical condition. Lights, horn, steering and brakes should be kept in proper adjustment at
all times.
6
Annual Inventory 2005
II. SAFETY
Important Phone Numbers
Satellite Phone Numbers
Boat, Maritime Maid……………………………………………... 8816-3144-4429
FSL Ray Koleser…………………………………………………. 8816-3144-2510
FSL Connie Hubbard…………………………………………….. 8816-3144-2500
FSL Tina Boucher………………………………………………... 8816-3145-7458
FSL Walter Foss…………………………………………………. 8816-3145-7457
FSL Stacy Allen………………………………………………….. 8816-3144-2509
FSL Will Bunten………………………………………………….. 8816-3145-7456
...................................................................... 8816-3144-2508
FSL Office (modem)……………………………………………... 8816-3145-7455
………………………………8816………………………………8816………………………………8816………………………………8816-
Cell Phone Numbers
FSL Team Leader: Ray Koleser……………………………….. 907-748-2091
FSL Coastal Coordinator: Connie Hubbard…………………… 907-748-2090
FSL QA: Walter Foss……………………………………………. 907-748-2089
FSL QA: Tina Boucher………………………………………….. 907-748-2092
FSL QA: Misha Yatzkov………………………………………… 907-748-2095
FSL QA: Stacy Allen…………………………………………….. 907-748-2097
FSL Crew Leader: Jerry Bednarczyk………………………….. 907-748-2086
FSL Crew Leader: Will Bunten…………………………………. 907-748-2096
FSL Crew Leader: Shawn Osborn……………………………... 907-748-1839
FSL
........................................... 907-748-2099
FSL Computer Specialist: Lisa Mahal…………………………. 907-748-2093
FSL Computer Specialist: Jane Reid………………………….. 907-748-2093
FSL Safety: Chris Teutsch……………………………………… 907-748-2087
FSL National Plan Travel Phone………………………………. 907-748-2085
Boat, Maritime Maid……………………………………………... 907-399-1770
Tongass National Forest
Dispatch Offices
Ketchikan – Rose Greenup (Office)…………………………… 907-228-6211
Petersburg – Bob Ernst (Office)……………………………….. 907-772-5899
Sitka – Libby Dougan (Office)…………………………………. 907-747-4306
Chugach National Forest
Central Dispatch Office…………………………………………. 907-288-3679
After Hours (Cell)…907-362-5004
Use only for crew check in calls to CDO (I-Phone)…..............907-743-9433
(Sat Phone)…..8816-3144-3574
7
Annual Inventory 2005
II. SAFETY
Regional Office
Regional Aviation Officer – John Liston (Office)…………….. 907-586-8837
(Cell)… 907-723-1778
Regional Aviation Safety Manager – Boyce Bingham (Office) 907-586-8740
(Cell)… 907-723-7270
Helicopter Operations Specialist - Dave Galloway……(Office)907-586-8782
(Cell)...907-723-1779
Regional Aviation Maintenance Inspector -- Mike Cook(Office)907-586-8770
(Cell)…907-723-1909
AFSL Office Telephone Numbers
Front Desk.……………………………………………………….
Connie Hubbard………………………………………………….
Ray Koleser………………………………………………………
Dee Little………………………………………………………….
Chris Teutsch…………………………………………………….
Jane Reid…………………………………………………………
Ken Winterberger………………………………………………..
Lisa Mahal………………………………………………………..
FSL Day: Bill van Hees………………………………………….
(Cell)…
FSL Night: Bert Mead……………………………………………
(Cell)…
NOTES:
8
907-743-9400
907-743-9420
907-743-9416
907-743-9401
907-743-9414
907-743-9411
907-743-9419
907-743-9418
907-743-9412
907-748-2098
907-743-9417
907-748-2098
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
Table of Contents
Locating the plot on the ground………………………………………….10
Plots with active logging
Photo work formatting
A. First time visit to the field sample location…………………………..11
1. Locating the field sample location
2. Establishing the Photo Scale Reciprocal
3. Establishing a Base Line Azimuth…………………………………13
4. Reference Point to Plot Center Measurements
Azimuth
Ground Distance
B. Re-visit of the field sample location…………………………….…....14
Reverse RP method
RP locator key……………………………………………………….15
PC locator key……………………………………………………….16
Replacement Plot (Lost Plot)…………………………………………….16
9
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
Locating the Plot on the Ground
Establishing the location is the crucial first step in collecting valid field data. While
measurements at each location are used to collect statistical information for the entire inventory
unit, each location is also compared to satellite information for the same point. Because these
sampling layers must measure attributes on the same location, it is critical that the ground
sample be located as accurately as possible.
Plots with active logging
If the plot area is being logged (timber is being felled, bucked, or yarded) or is unsafe to visit
because of active logging, DO NOT ESTABLISH THE PLOT ! Note on the plot folder the status
of the logging operation and return the plot to the unit coordinator. Proceed to an alternate plot if
available.
A word on photo navigating in Alaska
Using a map, ortho photos, aerial photos, and a GPS unit, the first task is to find the ground
location of the plot center (PC) delineated on the photos. All ground locations will be located
from a reference point (RP) so that the location can be found during future remeasurement. At
some locations, the PC can also be located on the ground visually without chaining from an RP.
Some areas of Alaska have very poor or limited air photo coverage. Typically crews will have
plenty of time to evaluate air photography and plan their approach to plot prior to departing. If
your photography looks suspect or you have doubt in your ability to follow the procedures
outlined here due to poor photo quality, please get advice from experienced crew leaders and/or
the unit coordinator prior to departing. In some extreme cases, travel to plot will be performed
with only a GPS using previous or new plot coordinates.
Photo-work formatting (or, how to correctly annotate navigation photos)
There could be several different types of photos included in the folder taken to plot (b&w ortho,
pocket cir, or satellite color ortho). The crew leader or designated photo interpreter will
determine which photo is best to receive the RP/PC pinpricks. The best photo should include all
relevant information needed for future crews to navigate successfully to the RP and PC.
Sometimes, in the case of plot re-measurement, the newest photo will not be the best to use. In
this situation, it is acceptable to re-use older photos.
If using a new photo on a re-measurement plot, make sure to transfer the prior visit RP/PC
pinpricks from the old photo. Make sure this can be accomplished with error free certainty. In
this situation, transfer the RP data and format it as shown below, (converted to English units) to
the new photo.
The data written on the reverse of the photo should be in the following format:
On a photo that has never been marked up (new plot /re-measure)
Both the Reference Point (RP) & Plot Center (PC) will be pinpricked and visible on the
reverse. Each of these pinpricks should be circled and identified as either a RP or PC. If they
10
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
are too close to each other to pinprick effectively, then note this below the RP information,
which will be in the following written format:
RP
Species = XXX
Diameter = XXX (to the nearest inch)
Azimuth = XXX
H. Distance = XXX (to the nearest foot)
To Subplot = X (1, 2, 3, or 4)
Notes: below the RP data explain any special circumstances that would be relevant for
crews visiting the plot in the future, such as: distance/azimuth determined by chaining or
GPS, a “new RP was established” (re-measure only), features around the RP helpful in
re-locating it.
On a photo that has been previously marked up (re-measure)
Follow the same format as shown above with the following steps to be used for special
circumstances:
If using the same RP as previous visit, first write the year of the last visit above the previous
(metric) RP data. Next, in an area free of marking, write all of the RP data (same format as
shown above) in English units with the current visit year written above it. Finally, a brief note
as to why the old photo was used instead of the new one.
If using a new RP, make sure it is pinpricked and circled/identified. Above the RP data (use
the same format as above) write the current year and “New RP”. Above the old (metric) data,
write the year of the last visit and “Old RP”.
Photo Calculations
The plot sampling for 2005 is considered a re-measurement; as many of the previously installed
periodic locations will be re-visited. However, there were some differencesin the sample grid
between the cross-over from the periodic and annual plot location grid. These “differences”
created a number of unsampled plots that will be visited and installed for the first time. Thus, for
the field season 2005 the following types of plot location and installation methods will be
encountered:
ƒ
First time visit to the field sample location (initial installation)
ƒ
Re-visit of the field sample location (previous installation)
Follow the appropriate steps outlined below to correctly locate, calculate distance/azimuth,
reference, and install the plot:
A. First time visit to the field sample location
1. Locating the Field Sample Location (Using Ortho Photos or CIR Photos)
Normally the field crew will establish the sample location using ortho photos. On occasion the
ortho photos will not be adequate for establishing the location and a color infra red aerial photo
(CIR) will be used instead. The procedures for using either medium are similar but the CIRs
11
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
require additional steps for scaling and orientation. To accurately establish the field location the
crew will need to know:
- Photo scale reciprocal to determine ground distances off the photo
- Azimuth to determine directions off the photo
2. Establishing the Photo Scale Reciprocal (PSR)
Ortho Photos: If using the ortho photos, the scale is already available (and is usually printed on
the photo). The ortho photos have been printed at a scale of 1:15840 unless noted otherwise.
For photos with a given scale,
PSR = Scale (ex. For 1:15840, PSR = 15840) Take the PSR determined here and plug it into
the equation in Ground Distance on page 13.
CIR Photos: If there is not enough detail on the ortho photo then the color infrared (CIR) print
can be scaled by using information from the ortho photo or measuring objects on the ground.
The PSR’s obtained here will be used in the formula under section 4 below.
To obtain photo scale reciprocal (PSR) for the CIR photos using the ortho photo, do the
following:
⇒ Locate two points on the aerial CIR photo that can also be located on the ortho photo and
pinprick them on the CIR. The two objects should be at least one centimeter apart.
⇒ Using a millimeter scale, measure the distance between the points on each of the photos
in meters (1mm =.001m).
⇒ Use the following formula to obtain the PSR:
Photo Scale Reciprocal = Ortho Distance ×15840
CIR Distance
To obtain PSR for the CIR photos using ground objects, do the following:
⇒ Locate two points on the aerial photo (CIR) that can also be located on the ground and
pinprick them on the CIR. The two objects should be at least 1/2 centimeter apart on the
photo.
⇒ With a 100 foot tape, measure the distance between the objects on the ground to the
nearest 1 foot (Ground Distance), and with a millimeter scale (1 mm = 0.001 meters),
measure the distance between the objects on the CIR (CIR Distance). Both distances
need to be in meters; so the ground measurement will require a conversion from feet to
meters. Multiply the ground distance (English) by 0.3048 to convert from feet to meters.
⇒ Use the following formula to calculate the PSR:
Photo Scale Reciprocal = Ground distance
CIR distance
12
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
3. Establishing a Base Line Azimuth
Ortho Photos: When using supplied ortho photos, the azimuth for a baseline on the photo can
be found on the plot location folder. For locations visited in 1996 and later, the baseline azimuth
is magnetic, with declination based on current World Aeronautical Charts (CD-12 & CE-15). If
the orientation of the ortho-photo baseline is in question, note that sample location names are
always printed so that when the label is properly oriented, the top of the ortho map is “north.” If
a baseline arrow/grid is not present, the edges of the image can be used to indicate the given
baseline azimuth.
CIR Photos: For CIR photos, the base line azimuth, like photo scale, can be obtained by one of
two methods: using the ortho photo or measuring between points on the ground.
To obtain an azimuth for the CIR photos using the ortho photo, do the following:
⇒ Visually but accurately transfer the true north baseline from the ortho photo to the CIR
photo and then subtract the declination from 360° to get the magnetic azimuth.
⇒ Record this azimuth on the photo.
To obtain an azimuth for the CIR photos using ground measurements, do the following:
⇒ Select two points within sight of each other that can also be seen on the CIR. Pinprick
these points and draw a line between them (a “base line”).
⇒ On the ground, sight between the two objects and record the magnetic azimuth on the
CIR photo.
4. Reference Point (RP) to Plot Center (PC) Measurements
Azimuth
⇒ With the aid of a stereo scope, locate the RP on the CIR and pinprick it on the ortho
photo (or use the ortho photo to locate the RP, if possible). Describe the RP on the
location record as well as circling and labeling the pinprick on the back of the ortho photo.
⇒ Draw a line between the RP and the PC that also intersects the baseline (described
above). If the RP-PC line does not intersect the baseline, then a third line intersecting the
baseline at a 90° angle can be drawn and its azimuth determined by placing the center of
a photo protractor at the intersection of the new line and the baseline, turning the
protractor so that the proper azimuth on the protractor is lined up with the baseline and
then reading the new azimuth. The new line now becomes the baseline.
⇒ Determine the direction from the RP to the PC by placing the center of the photo
protractor at the intersection of the baseline/RP-PC lines. Turn the protractor so that the
baseline azimuth on the protractor is lined up with the baseline.
⇒ Read the RP-PC azimuth off the protractor and record it on the back of the photo.
Ground Distance
- Measure the photo distance (PD) between the RP and PC using a millimeter scale (record in
meters, 1 mm =.001 m) and plug it into the formula below.
- Take the PSR (as determined from the methods in section 1 above) and plug into the formula
below.
13
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
- Calculate the ground distance using the following formula:
Ground Distance = Photo Distance(meters) x PSR x 3.2808
Here is an example of this formula in action:
Photo Distance (ie. RP to PC on photo) = 5 mm or 0.005 meters
Photo Scale Reciprocal = 15840
Thus, 0.005 x 15840 x 3.2808 = 259.839 feet. Round up to the nearest foot
NOTE: All of these calculations need to be written out in full on the back of the photo.
⇒ Collect all other necessary information for the RP and monument accordingly (see next
chapter).
⇒ Using compass and tape, measure out the computed ground distance, correcting for
slope, between the RP and PC. Measure from the face of the RP to the PC
B. Re-visit of the field sample location
The first step in re-locating a previously installed plot is to find the old RP. From the LZ or
vehicle/skiff parking spot use photos, written descriptions, maps/drawings, and/or GPS
coordinates to find the old RP.
NOTE: If the Plot Center location is found by the crew, remeasurements will be carried
out at that location regardless of any error in installation from the previous visit. If the
actual plot location is clearly not in the same location as the “+” on the image, make sure
to pinprick and label the actual plot location. The use of notes to describe previous
installation errors is mandatory! A new RP may be needed as well, so use the best
method below to establish one.
In all situations where a crew is chaining to PC, whether from an old or new RP. The end of the
chain should be marked with flagging and/or a temporary plot pin. This will allow for describing
error (h. dist and azm) from the end of chain to the PC in the location record notes. Also, if the
PC cannot be found and the chain ends in the correct location (after photo verification and a
decent search of the surrounding area) then a replacement plot (see Replacement Plot on page
16) will need to be established at the end of chain.
Reverse RP method
In some situations the RP may not be found (or there is no suitable replacement nearby), but
the PC is found by the crew. After remeasuring the plot, crews should create a new RP (time
permitting) using the following methods:
1. If GPS coverage is very good, locate the new RP (preferably somewhere between the LZ and
PC and it should be visible [and thus pinpricked] on the best photo). Now use the navigation
function on the GPS receiver to get an azimuth/horizontal distance from the new RP to the
collected PC coordinates. Record all the usual RP data on the location record, in the data
recorder, and on the RP tags. However, describe in the RP section of the location record the
method used to get the azm/hor dist from RP to PC. Also, write the method (GPS) used to
determine azimuth/distance near the RP data on the back of the photo.
14
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
2. If GPS coverage is poor, then pinprick the location of the new RP on the best photos
available (same photos as the PC pinprick). Using the methods in section A (page 11) to
determine the distance and azimuth from RP to PC. However, do not chain to PC (unless you
have adequate time). Record all the usual RP data on the location record, in the data recorder,
and on the RP tags. However, describe in the RP section of the location record the method used
to get the azm/hor dist from RP to PC.
Use the two Keys below as a general guide for dealing with some of the many possible
situations that could be encountered by field crews attempting to relocate Reference Points and
the Plot Center. There is no real way to cover every possible situation, so professional judgment
and common sense should be the rule for any situation not covered. Also, remember to
always document with detailed written notes anything that can help in relocating either
the Reference Point or the Plot Center.
RP Locator Key
RP Found
RP suitable for reuse
1. Make sure data between RP tags and location record match (in English units)
2. Replace tags not likely to survive another 10 years with new tags (add English
units to old tags if reusing them)
3. Chain to Plot Center (PC) [see PC key below]
RP NOT suitable for reuse
Suitable new RP nearby
1. -If the distance between the old and new RP is less than 10 feet, then use
same data as the old RP (converted to English units, with new dbh and species
as needed).Use notes to describe general location from new to old RP (ex. 5
feet at 170 deg).
-If the distance between the old and new RP is greater than 10 feet, write all
standard RP data (species, diam, etc.) from the new RP to the old in the
location record notes (first line of RP location & description). New RP tags will
have horizontal distance and azimuth to old RP etched into them (English
units). Use of notes in this situation is critical.
2. Chain to PC from old RP [then see PC key below]
Suitable new RP NOT nearby
1. Chain to PC from old RP [then see PC key below] you may need to use
the reverse RP method after measuring the plot.
RP NOT Found
15
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
Try to find the Plot Center using photos, written descriptions/maps, and/or GPS
coordinates (Install a new RP after measuring the plot, maybe use the reverse RP
method).
If the distance to PC from the RP is far (thousands of feet), then you may want to create
a new RP and figure out new distance/azimuth to PC (using techniques in section A pg
11). If this method is chosen by the crew leader, care must be taken to assure that the
PC can be found at the end of the chain. Again, it is very important to write down notes
describing the procedures used to relocate (or attempts to relocate) Plot Center. Chain to
PC from new RP [see PC key below]
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PC Locator Key
PC Found
Replace PC witness trees as needed (see Witness Trees next chapter) and remeasure
plot. If PC was found and the RP is missing or not suitable, then use Reverse RP
method shown at the beginning of section B (page 14).
If the PC is found, but the end of the chain from RP lies greater than 30 feet from the PC
plot pin, then add notes describing the horizontal distance/azimuth from end of chain to
PC plot pin.
PC NOT Found
1. Begin a spiral search from the end of chain from RP; extend up to 200 feet in radius
(terrain permitting).
2. At same time, use all photos, drawings/maps, previous data, and/or GPS coordinates
to aid in relocating.
3. If the end of chain does not appear to be at the PC photo pinprick, then use photos to
find the pinprick location visually on the ground. If the ground location of the pinprick is
found then begin a spiral search of that area, extending up to 200 feet in radius.
4. REMEMBER: If the previous plot is found by the field crew (whether it is right on, or
500 ft in error) the plot will be remeasured in the place it was installed. Notes are
required with previous error situations;this will aid future crews when relocating PC
locations.
5. If no trace of the previous plot can be found after using steps 1-3, then treat as lost
plot and begin Replacement Plot procedures below.
Replacement Plot (Lost Plot)
If no sign of the plot can be found after an extensive search using all the data available, then the
plot will be considered lost. Once the crew leader determines that the plot is lost, then a
replacement plot will need to be installed. Plot locating and layout should be performed as if
installing the plot for the first time. Use the following steps to correctly account for the lost plot,
and to create a replacement plot:
16
Annual Inventory 2005
III. LOCATING THE PLOT
1. The downloaded plot file (lost plot) should be activated in the “Plot Menu” using the following
codes:
a) STATE = 02, PLOT NUMBER = xxxxx, and QA STATUS = 1 (where xxxxx is the lost plot
number)
b) From the “Plot Menu” screen enter “Plot lvl data” then enter “1 - Plot Attributes”
2. Enter the following in the “Plot Attributes” screen:
SAMPLE KIND = 2 (Remeasurement Plot)
DATA SOURCE = 1 (Ground Visit)
PLOT STATUS = 3 (Nonsampled)
PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 06 (Lost Plot)
CONDITION CLASS STATUS 1 = 5 (Nonsampled)
ESTIMATED NONSAMPLE LAND COVER TYPE = XXX
(see Item 9 in Plot Level Data chapter)
PLOT LEVEL NOTES = Plot is Lost, amount of time searching, etc.
The lost (old) plot is then edited/closed. Be sure to include descriptive notes on the location
record explaining how and why the plot could not be relocated.
3. Start a new plot file (replacement plot) using the following codes prior to entering the “Plot
Menu”:
STATE = 02, PLOT NUMBER = 99999, QA STATUS = 1
NOTE: PLOT NUMBER will remain 99999 until returning to the field office, there an IM
team member or a field supervisor will assist in renaming the plot file with the next
available number on the coastal unit plot number list.
4. The replacement plot is treated as a new (1st time visit) plot overall. However, certain Items in
the “Plot Attributes” screen need to be coded with the following:
SAMPLE KIND = 3 (Replacement Plot)
PREVIOUS PLOT NUMBER = XXXXX (where xxxxx is the lost plot number)
P2/P3 PLOT TYPE = 0 (P2 Plot) or 1 (P2/P3 Plot)
NOTE: If “P3” is printed on the old “lost plot” folder label, then enter a 1 for this Item. If
there is no “P3” on the label, then it is considered a P2 only and 0 should be entered. It is
very important that the proper code be selected so that the crew can access all of the
appropriate data entry screens (whether they are P2 or P3 screens).
17
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. The Reference Point (RP)
19
2. Monumenting the Plot Center (PC)
21
3. Witness Trees
22
4. Other Plot Monumenting Notes
24
Plot Layout & Referencing MQO’s
26
18
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
Monumentation in National Forest Wilderness
Please check the plot folder label to determine ownership that would require special
monumenting procedures outlined below:
Generally:
-All flagging used as an aid to access plots or used to assist in plot layout, must be removed at
the completion of plot measurements.
-No paint or paintstick marks will be used to monument the plot, identify witness/RP trees, or to
mark breast height.
-Nails will not be allowed to mark the point of dbh. Instead a single nail at the base of the tree
will be used and the point of measure will be performed 4.5 feet up from the base nail. The base
nail will face plot center at ground level or on the uphill side of the tree if there is a slope. If the
point of dbh is higher or lower than 4.5 feet above the base nail, then explain in the notes for
that tree record.
-Cutting vines/moss that obstruct the use of diameter tapes accurately will be prohibited. In this
situation estimate the diameter, use the appropriate “dbh check” code, and use tree notes to
explain why.
-All plot monumentation near/within a heavily traveled area (trails, campsites, and roads) should
be minimized from being visible (document actions taken to minimize visibility on the plot
location record).
-Plot pins will be inserted into the ground so that only one inch is visible (if possible) flagging
may not be attached to the plot pin.
Reference Points / Plot-Subplot Witnesses:
-Nail only one square tag at the base of the Reference Point facing the direction of the route to
plot. Make sure that all of the required information is etched into the tag.
-Plot and Subplot witness trees shall receive a single tag (square for PC or round for subplot
center) at the base of the tree/object and facing the respective subplot/plot center.
NOTE: the above procedures are in addition to the plot integrity rules(starting on page 25) that
are to be followed for all plots (regardless of ownership).
1. The Reference Point (RP)
The RP references the plot pin in the ground (typically at the center of subplot 1, a.k.a. PC). It is
an object (usually a tree) that is prominent, apt to be present at next visit, and easily located on
the ground. Do not reference a subplot other than subplot 1 just because that subplot is closer
to the RP. Reference another subplot only when there is a significant obstacle or other
obstruction between the RP and Subplot 1, but not between the RP and the other subplot
chosen.
19
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
Selecting the RP: The RP should be distinctive on both the ground and on the new photos.
You may reuse the previous RP tree if it is suitable. If the old RP tree is dead, missing, or
difficult to identify on the ground or plot photo, select a new RP (but leave the tags on the old
RP). If possible, it should be a tree that is not likely to die or be cut before the next inventory.
You may select a snag or other object for an RP (i.e., a shrub, large boulder, or other distinctive
object etc.). If you utilize such an RP, describe it on the back of the plot photo and in "RP
Location & Description" on the location record.
Tag the RP: Mark the RP tree with three new tags. If using the same RP as last visit, then
leave old tags even though new tags are being applied. Write out (etch) the appropriate
information required on all three aluminum square tags. Then nail both tags 6 feet above ground
line, one facing the direction you expect future crews to approach the RP (typically from the LZ),
the other facing the direction of Plot Center (PC). Nail the third aluminum square tag below
stump height, on the side of the tree facing Plot Center (PC). When attaching a tag, drive the
nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood. If the RP is a building, rock,
or other item that cannot/should not be tagged, make a note in the "RP Location Description"
(on the location record) and in the AK RP Notes, that it is not tagged and a description.
Pinprick the RP location: For all plots pinprick the ground location of the RP on the new
photo. When the plot is being installed for the first time use the RP and PC pinpricks to calculate
the correct horizontal distance and azimuth between them (see previous chapter, Locating the
Plot).
Record RP data: Record the species of the RP, it's d.b.h. to the nearest inch, azimuth FROM
RP to plot pin, and horizontal distance measured (to the nearest foot) from the square tag at the
base of the RP to the plot pin. Record this on the back of the aerial photo, etch it in the required
location on the square aluminum tags placed on the RP, record under RP Data on the location
record, and in the RP information screen in the data recorder. In “Location Description" on the
location record, write any information that would aid the next crew in relocating the plot.
20
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
Describe prominent features present in the plot area that are unlikely to change in the next ten
years; detailed examples include: slope, aspect, topographic position, recognizable
physiographic features (ie. streams, rock outcrops, benches), man-made features, and unusual
or large trees. If any new roads have been built in the plot area since the date of the new field
photos, sketch them on the location record, if it will help the next crew to find the plot.
Route to RP:
Record a clear and concise narrative for the travel route to the RP in the space provided on the
location record. Begin at a permanent starting point. The term “starting point” is somewhat
ambiguous. Normally the starting point is a landing zone (LZ), arterial or secondary road
junction. In some cases (eg. wilderness access) the starting point may be a trailhead, shoreline,
or the end of a local road. Whatever starting point is selected, it should be easily identifiable
from the map, aerial photo (if there is photo coverage of the starting point), and on the ground.
The narrative for the route to RP shall identify the mode of travel (driving, hiking, helicopter,
floatplane, skiff, etc.), route traveled (include road and/or trail designation number), direction of
travel (use cardinal directions), and the distance traveled on each segment.
2. Monumenting Plot Center (PC)
Before monumenting, see if an exception (below) qualifies first. NOTE: all old PC and subplot
center pins (regardless of color or condition) should be replaced with the new white fiberglass
plot pins and taken back to the field office as garbage.
An exception
The plot center monument is not placed at the center of subplot 1 (Plot Center) if either of the
following situations occurs:
a) The center of subplot 1 is too hazardous to visit (examples: subplot center 1 is in the middle
of a pond, or the middle of a freeway, or on the side of a cliff)
OR
b) Placing the plot center monument at the center of subplot 1 is very apt to irritate a landowner
(example: subplot center 1 is in the middle of someone's front lawn).
If the exception applies, witness the center of the lowest-numbered subplot on the standard
layout that has an accessible forest land condition class present within its 24.0-foot fixed-radius
plot.
Specifically, do the following steps:
a) Place white plot pin at the center of this subplot, remove old subplot center pin.
b) Witness the new plot pin to two nearby trees; see "Witnessing the Plot Center" on page
22.
c) Reference the new plot pin to an RP; see "The Reference Point (RP)" on page 19.
d) If a revisited plot, determine and pinprick the location of the field sample location on the
new photos using photo interpretation. On all plots: use a sharpie to circle the pinprick on
the back of the photo and write "PC" (plot center) and the plot number near the circle.
21
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
NOTE: If one of these exceptions applies, then the subplot being referenced is not the center of
the plot (subplot 1). Notes in the location record are required to inform future crews of this
situation and to notify them which subplot is being referenced by the RP.
Standard Monumenting (Exception above does not qualify)
Do the following steps:
a) Install a white plot pin at this location on the ground and tie a piece of flagging to it. The pin
should be inserted into the ground far enough to leave about 1/3 visible (about 5-7 inches,
soil permitting). On remeasurement plots, if the previous PC plot pin is recovered intact,
replace it with the new white pin, taking old one back to field office as garbage.
b) Witness the new plot pin to two nearby trees; see "3. Witness Trees" below.
c) Make sure the new plot pin is referenced to an RP; see "1. The Reference Point (RP)" on
page 19.
d) Circle the pinprick with a sharpie on the back of the photo and write "PC" (plot center) near
the circle.
3. Witness Trees
Witnessing the Plot Center (PC)
To witness the plot center pin with nearby trees, do the following steps:
a) Select two trees near the plot center monument that form, as closely as possible, a right
angle with the white colored plot center pin. For remeasurement plots, remove all old square
witness tags, regardless of whether the witness is being replaced or not. All new PC witness
tags shall be recorded in English units and the distance will be slope from the bottom nail
head to PC pin where it enters the ground. If live trees are not available, use stumps or
sound snags.
b) Write out the required information onto the square aluminum tags for each of the witness
trees (2 tags per tree).
c) Nail the appropriate square aluminum tag in two locations on each witness tree; one well
below stump height (< 0.5 foot above the ground), the other approximately 6 feet from
ground level. Both should be on the side facing the plot center pin. When attaching a tag,
drive the nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly into the wood. Slide the tags
out as far as possible from the bark surface and bend the corners over the nails (this helps
keep the tag from being “swallowed” as the tree grows).
d) If a stump: If the witness is a stump < 4.5 ft tall, nail an aluminum square tag at the base
facing subplot center, also attach an additional square tag to the top of the stump. If the
stump is not a tally tree, record "stump" in the tree comment. When nailing tags to stumps,
pound the nail in flush to the bole. Tags nailed to stumps stay attached longer if the bark is
removed prior to nailing the tag in.
e) If another object: If the witness is a shrub, nail or wire an aluminum square tag to the base
of the shrub facing subplot center. If possible, nail or wire an additional square tag higher up
which faces the direction you expect future crews to approach the subplot. If the witness is
another object (rock, etc.), monument and tag as appropriate. In both cases record
comments in the “tree notes” section.
22
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
Witnessing subplots (non-PC)
Select 2 trees near the pin that form, as closely as possible, a right angle with the pin. If trees
are not available, use stumps or sound snags. If the witness is not a tree, follow procedures
shown in c) below. On subplots established previously, reuse the previous witness trees, or if
there are better trees available, use new witness trees. Renew old witness tags (rounds) as
needed. All subplot witness slope distance measurements are performed from the nail head (or
other point written in notes) to the subplot pin where it enters the ground.
a) For all trees: Nail an aluminum round (yellow side out) 6 feet above ground facing the
direction you expect future crews to approach the subplot, and nail an aluminum round tag
(yellow side out) below stump height facing subplot center. If the witness is a live tally tree
with a diameter 3.0 in. d.b.h. or larger, mark where diameter is measured with an aluminum
nail. If it is not a tally tree, then no dbh nail is required (however, the tags are still required).
When attaching a round tag, drive the nail into the tree only enough to anchor the nail firmly
into the wood.
b) If a stump: If the witness is a stump < 4.5 ft tall, nail an aluminum round at the base facing
subplot center, also attach an additional aluminum round tag to the top of the stump. If the
stump is not a tally tree, record "stump" in the tree comment. When nailing tags to stumps,
pound the nail in flush to the bole. Tags nailed to stumps stay attached longer if the bark is
removed prior to nailing the tag in.
c) If another object: If the witness is a shrub, nail or wire an aluminum round tag to the base of
the shrub facing subplot center. If possible, nail or wire an additional round higher up which
faces the direction you expect future crews to approach the subplot. If the witness is another
object, monument and tag as appropriate. In both cases record comments in the subplot
notes and on the location record
23
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
4. Other Plot Monumentation Notes
Locating the microplot
The center of each 6.8-foot microplot is located 12 feet from each subplot center at 90 degrees.
Mark each microplot with a yellow plot pin at microplot center, and tie a piece of flagging to the
pin. The pin should be inserted into the ground far enough to leave about 1/3 visible (about 5-7
inches, soil permitting). This will ensure the best chance at relocating the pin (still in the ground)
with future field visits.
Plot Location Record
The plot location record is to be filled out, in entirety, before turning in for QA/QC review. Many
of the items to be documented are best completed while working on the plot in the field. To
avoid making mistakes when finalizing the notes away from the plot (back in the field office)
make sure the most important details are written down prior to leaving the plot. Most importantly
document the travel description from LZ (or skiff/vehicle parking) to the RP, describe any
important objects/features near the RP, whether or not the original or a new RP is being used,
describe the plot area including: general health, species mix, historical natural/manmade
impacts to the condition (regardless of whether it is forest/shrub-forb-herb/or non-forest), sketch
out a few important features on the plot diagram map (front) or Location map (back), and finally
be sure to go through the checklist prior to leaving the plot (sample below):
LOCATION CHECKLIST:
___ Monumentation
(RP, all witnesses)
___ GPS coordinates collected
(LZ, RP, PC)
___ Photo work
(Pinprick, data on reverse)
___ Plot level data
P3 Checklist
___ Vegetation
___ Lichens
___ DWM
___ Crowns
___ Condition Class
___ Subplot Info
(Invasives, mapping, & seedlings)
___ Tree Record
(Tree & Sapling)
___ Site Trees
(3 site/age per species, per condition)
GPS Coordinates
The following locations on the ground will require the collecting of GPS coordinates (stored as
waypoints):
LZ/TR
RP
PC
(landing zone/vehicle-skiff parking)
(reference point)
(plot center) or (one of the other subplots if center of plot is not accessible)
See GPS INFO on page 38 for the specific items to be entered into the field data recorder.
See chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS) on page 146 for setting up and using the Magellan GPS
receivers.
24
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
Maintaining Plot Integrity
Each crew is responsible for preventing unnecessary damage to current or prospective sample
trees, saplings, seedlings, and other resources. Because plots will be remeasured in the future,
it is desirable to ensure that observed changes are representative of the landscape as a whole
and not due to activities of a previous field crew. The following activities are allowed subject to
conditions from the landowner / managing agency. For example agencies that manage
wilderness areas may request that tree tags not be used because they detract from the
“wilderness experience” of recreationists. Always check the plot folder or with your field
supervisor for special instructions prior to beginning inventory procedures. The following field
procedures are permitted unless stated otherwise.
• Nailing tags on reference and witness trees so that the RP and PC can be relocated.
• Boring of trees for age and radial growth to determine tree age, site index, stand age, or for
other reasons.
• Nailing, tagging, and marking trees and saplings to aid in relocating, identifying, and
remeasurement.
The following practices are specifically prohibited within the entire plot area including all four
points. This area is defined as a 150 foot radius circle around the PC:
• Collecting natural artifacts such as stem burls, antlers, cones, bird nests, etc is prohibited.
Removal of stem burls creates open wounds on trees that may allow greater opportunity for
disease or insect attack. Removal of other items may alter natural ecological patterns.
• Building fires is prohibited.
Hot prolonged fires can kill soil microorganisms thus sterilizing the soil. Additionally, the
amount of down wood on the plot is altered.
• Excessive limb removal is discouraged.
It is recognized that it is necessary to remove dead limbs from some species such as spruce
but remove the absolute minimum. Removal of live limbs is strictly prohibited as it reduces
plant vigor and open wounds provide opportunity for insect and disease attack. Limbs should
not be removed on witness and reference trees to facilitate observation of tags with the
exception of trees located off-plot (>150 feet from PC).
• Discarding trash is strictly prohibited.
This includes biodegradable items such as apple cores and grape seeds. These items have
the potential of sprouting thus changing the species composition of the site.
• Boring and scribing of some specific tree species.
Tree species with thin bark, such as quaking aspen, birch, and young cottonwoods are
particularly vulnerable to disease when open wounds are created. Try to bore trees off the
fixed radius plots for these species.
25
Annual Inventory 2005
IV. PLOT LAYOUT AND REFERENCING
Plot layout and referencing MQO
RP selection:
Tolerance: No error in selection criteria, 95% of the time
RP data items (diam, species, etc.):
Tolerance: See RP Info on page 43
Aerial photograph:
Tolerance: Previous and current pinpricks in correct spot: +/- 1 mm, 100% of the time
Current plot center and RP labeled correctly: no errors, 100% of the time
Plot location:
Tolerance: Remeasured plot: relocated, 100% of the time
New plot: photos 1:12,000 scale or greater: located +/- 10.0 ft, 90% of the time
photos smaller than 1:12,000 scale +/- 30.0 ft, 90% of the time
Subplot location:
Tolerance:Remeasured subplot: +/- 0.5 ft. of previous location, 100% of the time
New subplot: +/- 5.0 ft., 90% of the time
Subplot witness (tree) selection:
Tolerance: No error in selection criteria, 95% of the time
Microplot location:
Tolerance:Remeasured microplot: +/- 0.1 ft. of previous location, 100% of the time
New microplot: +/- 0.1 ft., 90% of the time
NOTES:
26
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
(First three variables are recorded prior to entering into Plot Menu)
STATE, PLOT NUMBER, &
QA STATUS………………………………………………………………………………..28
Plot Attributes…………………………………………………………….29
GPS Info……………………………………………………………………38
RP Info……………………………………………………………………...43
27
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
NOTE: The first three items in PLOT LEVEL DATA will be entered by the user prior to entering
the Plot Menu.
There are three “subchapters” (Plot Attributes, GPS Info, and RP Info) in the PLOT LEVEL
DATA chapter, and each represents a different option in the PLOT LEVEL DATA menu, which is
accessed by selecting “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu.
Plot Level Data records the plot location and information about the field crew visit and
landowner contact. This information aids future crews in plot relocation, sets up date and
inventory cycle information in the data recorder, and makes it possible to analyze the
relationship of plot data to other mapped data.
Item 1--STATE
Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) code identifying the
State where the plot center is located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code
02
State
Alaska
Item 2--PLOT NUMBER
Record the identification number for each plot, unique within each survey unit.
If SAMPLE KIND = 3 (replacement plot) then use 99999 as a surrogate number until a new
plot number is reassigned back at the field office. See your supervisor before downloading
any SAMPLE KIND = 3 plots back at the field office (see Replacement Plot on page 16 for
more information)
When collected: All plots SAMPLE KIND = 1 or SAMPLE KIND = 2
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 99999
Item 3--QA STATUS
Record the code to indicate the type of plot data being collected.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
28
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
File Name
Code#
P
C
R
T
D
B
H
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Visit type
Standard production plot
Cold check *
Reference plot (off grid)
Training/practice plot (off grid)
Botched plot file (disregard during data processing)
Blind check
Production plot (hot check)
#
Electronic data files are automatically named by the data recorder using the PLOT
NUMBER and File Name Code (shown in column above). Electronic data files for plots with
QA STATUS 2 to 6 are saved as separate files so that the original standard production plot
data is preserved and can be used for quality control and statistical analysis.
Cold check - an informal inspection done either as part of the training process, or as part of
ongoing QC program. The inspector checks completed work after a crew has turned it in.
Data errors are corrected (in a separate, updated plot data file).
Blind check - a formal inspection done without crew data on hand; a full re-installation of the
plot for the purpose of obtaining a measure of data quality. The two data sets are
maintained separately. Data errors are NOT corrected. Blind checks are done on
production plots only.
Hot check - an informal inspection. Usually done as a part of the training process. The
inspector is present on the plot with the crew and provides immediate feedback regarding
data quality. Data errors are corrected in the plot file as the crew completes its work.
* Note to QA and IM: In 2005 tally will create the cold check (2) template from the completed QA
blind check (6) file. Previously, the cold check template was a copy of the completed standard
production (1 or 7) file.
- PLOT ATTRIBUTES Accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu.
Item 4-- AK SAMPLE KIND
Record the code that describes the kind of plot being installed.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time.
Values:
29
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
1
Initial plot
establishment
2
Remeasurement
3
Replacement
plot
The initial establishment and sampling of a national design plot (FIA Field
Guide versions 1.1 and higher). SAMPLE KIND 1 is assigned under the
following circumstances:
• Initial activation of a panel or subpanel
• Reactivation of a panel or subpanel that was previously dropped
• Resampling of established plots that were not sampled at the previous
visit
Remeasurement of a national design plot that was sampled at the
previous inventory -- field-visited or remotely classified.
A replacement plot for a previously established plot. Assign SAMPLE
KIND = 3 if a plot is installed at a location other than the previous location
(i.e., plots that have been lost, moved, or otherwise replaced). Note: that
replacement plots require a separate plot file for the previous plot.
Replaced plots are assigned PLOT STATUS = 3 (nonsampled), SAMPLE
KIND = 2, and the appropriate NONSAMPLED REASON code. The plot
number for the replacement plot is assigned by NIMS. Use 99999 for the
replacement plot number while in the field until a proper number can be
assigned back in the field office. See page 16 for more information about
replacement plots.
Item 5--AK data source
Record the code that describes the source for the data collected on the plot location.
When collected: All Plots
Field width:1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Data
Code
Description
Source
1
Ground
All data collected from a ground visit by the field crew.
Location was flown over; information for the location was
2
Fly-over
determined from the air.
Information for location was determined in the office using photo
3
PI
interpretation.
OtherSpecify source of data in Plot Level Notes and on the location
4
specify
record
Item 6--PLOT STATUS
Record the code that describes the sampling status of the plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
30
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
1 Sampled
2 Sampled
at least one accessible forest land condition present on plot or
previously had at least one accessible forest land condition on plot
no accessible forest land condition present on plot and no
previously accessible forest land condition on plot = Non Forest
3 Nonsampled
See Chapter VI. CONDITION CLASS starting on page 46, for more information on what
qualifies as accessible forest land.
Item 7--AK PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (Plot Nons Rsn)
For entire plots that cannot be sampled, record one of the following reasons
When collected: When PLOT STATUS = 3
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Description
Outside U.S. boundary - Assign this code to condition classes beyond the
01
U.S. border. Entire plots would only be assigned this code if it is determined
that a previously measured plot is currently beyond the U.S. border.
Denied access area - Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which
access is denied by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only
reasonable route to the plot denies access. There are no minimum area or
02
width requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access.
Because a denied access condition can become accessible in the future, it
remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine
if access is available.
Hazardous situation - Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot
be accessed because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries,
strip mines, illegal substance plantations, temporary high water, etc.
03
Although the hazard is not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition
remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine
if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width
requirements for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.
Lost data - The plot data file was discovered to be corrupt after panel was
completed and submitted for processing. This code is assigned to entire
05
plots or full subplots that could not be processed, and is applied at the time
of processing after notification to the region. NOTE: This code is for office
use only.
Lost plot - This code applies to whole plots that cannot be relocated. This
situation requires notification of the field supervisor. Whenever this code is
06
assigned, a replacement plot is required. The plot that is lost is assigned
SAMPLE KIND = 2 and NONSAMPLED REASON = 6. The replacement plot
is assigned SAMPLE KIND = 3.
08
Skipped visit - This code applies to whole plots that are skipped (ie., the
31
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
09
10
11
entire plot should be assigned to this condition class). It is used for plots that
are not completed prior to the time a panel is finished and submitted for
processing. NOTE: This code is for office use only.
Dropped intensified plot - This code applies only to regions engaged in
intensification. It is used for intensified plots that have been dropped due to
a change in grid intensity.
NOTE:
• This code is for office use only.
• This code is primarily intended for regions engage in sub-paneling for
intensification purposes
• Plot records for dropped subpanels may be generated with the
information management system.
Other - This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not sampled
due to a reason other than one of the specific reasons already listed. A
description of the situation is required in the PLOT LEVEL NOTES.
Ocean - Plot falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line. Where rivers
or canals enter the ocean, ocean water begins where the river/canal width
exceeds ¼ nautical mile.
Item 8--CONDITION CLASS STATUS 1 (CC1 Status)
Record the CONDITION CLASS STATUS at the center of subplot 1. Record the code that
describes the status of the condition. The instructions in Section B and C (in the
CONDITION CLASS chapter starting on page 48) apply when delineating condition classes
that differ by CONDITION CLASS STATUS.
When collected: When PLOT STATUS = 2,3
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Description
2
Nonforest land
3
Noncensus water
4
Census water
5
Nonsampled
Definitions for Nonforest, Census, and Noncensus water begin on page 48 in the Condition
Class chapter.
Item 9--AK estimated nonsampled land cover type (NonS Land Cvr)
Record an estimate of what cover type has plurality over the entire plot area. This variable is
only available when PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2,3,or 10. For example: if the plot is
nonsampled because of hazardous conditions (entered as 03 in PLOT NONSAMPLED
REASON above), but the plot area is stocked with mountain hemlock, then enter 270 for the
“estimated nonsampled land cover type”. Note: land cover type includes: Nonforest (002),
Noncensus water (003), and Census water(004).
When collected: When AK PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, or 10
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors in group or type
32
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
MQO: at least 95% of the time
Values:
Code Land Cover Type
002
Nonforest
003
Noncensus water
004
Census water
Spruce / Fir Group
122
white spruce
125
black spruce
264
268
270
271
Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock
Group
Pacific silver fir
subalpine fir
mountain hemlock
Alaska-yellow-cedar
281
Lodgepole Pine Group
lodgepole pine
301
304
305
Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group
western hemlock
western redcedar
Sitka spruce
703
Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group
cottonwood
901
902
Aspen / Birch Group
aspen
paper birch
911
Alder / Maple Group
red alder
Item 10--PREVIOUS PLOT NUMBER (Prev Plt Num)
Record the identification number for the plot that is being replaced.
When collected: When SAMPLE KIND = 3
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 00001 to 99999
33
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
Item 11--AK start date
Enter the month, day, and year in which the sampling on the location being measured was
started.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year
Tolerance: no errors
MQO: 100% of the time
Values: Month:
Month
Code
Month
January
01
May
February
02
June
March
03
July
April
04
August
Code
05
06
07
08
Month
September
October
November
December
Code
09
10
11
12
Day: 1-31
Year: ≥ 2005
Item 12-- HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD (Road Distance)
Record the straight-line distance from plot center (subplot 1) to the nearest improved road.
An improved road is a road of any width that is maintained as evidenced by pavement,
gravel, grading, ditching, and/or other improvements
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT
STATUS =1)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values:
Code Horizontal Distance
1
100 ft. or less
2
101 to 300 ft.
3
301 to 500 ft.
4
501 to 1000 ft.
5
1001 ft. to 1/2 mile
6
1/2 to 1 mile
7
1 to 3 miles
8
3 to 5 miles
9
Greater than 5 miles
Item 13--WATER ON PLOT (Water Plot)
Record the water source that has the greatest impact on the area within the accessible forest
land portion of any of the four subplots. The coding hierarchy is listed in order from large
permanent water to temporary water. This variable can be used for recreation, wildlife,
hydrology, and timber availability studies.
34
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land condition class (PLOT
STATUS = 1)
Field width: 1 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 90% of the time.
Values:
Code Water on plot
None – no water sources within the accessible forest land condition
0
class
1
Permanent streams or ponds too small to qualify for noncensus water*
Permanent water in the form of deep swamps, bogs, marshes without
2
standing trees present and less than 1.0 ac in size or with standing
trees
Ditch/canal – human made channels used as a means of moving
3
water, such as irrigation or drainage
4
Temporary streams
*A definition for Noncensus water can be found on page 50.
Item 14--CREW TYPE
Record the code to specify what type of crew is measuring the plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Crew type
1
Standard field crew
QA crew (any QA crew member present collecting data, regardless of
2
plot QA Status)
Item 15--AK crew leader (CLead)
Enter first initial and last name of the crew leader assigned to this plot. The crew leader is
responsible for correct plot installation and overall quality of the data.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 12
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1 name of up to 12 characters
Item 16--AK crew member 1 - AK crew member 5 (Name1-Name5)
Enter the first initial and last name of up to five additional crew members taking
measurements on the plot with the crew leader.
35
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
When collected: All plots
Field width: 12
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: up to 12 characters for each additional crew member
Item 17--AK landowner plot summary request (Own Request)
1-digit code which indicates if a landowner of the plot area requests a summary of the data
collected on their land. Make any special comments relevant to the data request (ie.
landowner does not own all 4 subplots, the owner of subplot 2 wants data, etc.) on the
location record.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code
0
1
2
Landowner data request
No data request
Plot summary requested
Special case request-specify
Item 18--AK end date
Enter the month, day, and year in which the sampling on the location being measured was
completed.
NOTE: In most cases the sampling for a location will be completed in one day, in which case
the start and end dates will be the same.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year
Tolerance: no errors
MQO: 100% of the time
Values: Month:
Month
Code
Month
Code
January
01
May
05
February
02
June
06
March
03
July
07
April
04
August
08
Month
September
October
November
December
Code
09
10
11
12
Day: 1-31
Year: ≥ 2005
Item 19--AK P2/P3 plot type (P2/P3 Plot)
This variable will be needed when creating a Replacement plot file for a lost or missing plot
(see Replacement Plots page 16). Check the old (lost/missing) plot folder to see if it has
36
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
“P3” printed on it. If it does, then use code 1 for this variable. If it does not then use 0 for this
variable. For all other plot situations this variable will be downloaded. (If the plot cannot be
extracted, then manual data entry may also require the appropriate code for this variable).
When collected: All plots, downloaded, may enter manually under dire circumstances
Field width: 1
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 100% of the time
Values:
Code Description
0
P2 Plot Only
1
P2/P3 Co-located (co-install)
Item 20--PLOT - LEVEL NOTES
Use these fields to record notes pertaining to the entire plot.
Accessible by pushing the F4 key while in the Plot Attributes screen.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 160
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: English language words, phrases, and numbers
Downloaded (↓ Not to be updated↓) portion of the screen
These Items will be downloaded for your use in locating old plots, or will give information that
does not require editing by the field crews.
Item 21--AK old location ID (Old Loc ID)
This item is included as an aid in finding/identifying old reference/witness tags to correctly
locate PC.
When collected: downloaded, when plot has been previously assigned an old location ID.
Field width: 7 (3 alpha + 4 numeric)
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: varies, numbering system based on three letters abbreviating map quad names with
a unique 4 digit number. Example: COR0260 = Cordova quad plot 260
Item 22--Date of previous inventory (Prev Date)
If the previous visit end date is known, then it will be downloaded and available for reference
here.
When collected: downloaded only when plot has been previously visited.
Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year
Tolerance: no errors
37
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
MQO: 100% of the time
Values: Month:
Month
Code
January
01
February
02
March
03
April
04
Month
May
June
July
August
Code
05
06
07
08
Month
September
October
November
December
Code
09
10
11
12
Day: 1-31
Year: variable, > 1994
Item 23--FIELD GUIDE VERSION (Core Man Ver)
Record the version number of the Forest Inventory and Analysis National Core Field Guide
which was used to collect the data on this plot. This will be used to match collected data to
the proper version of the field manual
When collected: All plots, downloaded
Field width: 2 digits (x.y)
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 100% of the time.
Values: 2.0
Item 24--AK data recorder program version # (PDR Version)
A 3-digit field identifying the version number of the data recorder program used to collect
data on the plot. In the format x.y.z. PNW AK data recorder program version # will start at
5.0.0 at the beginning of the field season. If minor modifications to the data recorder
program are made in response to changes in field procedures or programming requirements,
the z field will be changed to z+1. If more significant changes are made, the y field will be
changed to y+1. The first field (x) will be changed only in the event of a major modification to
the program. Field manuals are not reprinted during the season, but future printings would
include any change(s) made to procedures. Do not change the data recorder generated
code.
When collected: downloaded, all plots
Field width: three digits (x.y.z.)
Tolerance: no errors
MQO: 100% of the time
Values: x.y.z (starting at 5.0.0)
- GPS INFO Accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu.
There will be multiple records per plot in the GPS screen. Typically a set of coordinates for 3
types; LZ, RP, and PC will be entered into the data recorder, each requiring separate records or
lines of data.
38
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
GPS COORDINATES
Use a global positioning system (GPS) unit to determine the plot coordinates and elevation
of all field visited plot locations.
GPS UNIT SETTINGS, DATUM, and COORDINATE SYSTEM
Consult the GPS unit operating manual or other regional instructions to ensure that the GPS
unit internal settings, including Datum and Coordinate system, are correctly configured.
Each FIA unit will determine the Datum to be used in that region. Coordinates collected
using any appropriate datum can be converted back to a national standard for reporting
purposes.
See Chapter XI. COORDINATES (GPS) starting on page 146 for instructions on setting up
and using the field GPS unit.
COLLECTING READINGS
Collect at least 180 GPS readings at the plot center which will then be averaged by the GPS
unit. Each individual reading should have an error of less than 70 feet if possible (the error
of all the averaged readings is far less).
Soon after arriving at plot center, use the GPS unit to attempt to collect coordinates. If
suitable readings (180 readings at error less than or equal to 70 feet) cannot be obtained, try
again before leaving the plot center.
If it is still not possible to get suitable coordinates from plot center, attempt to obtain them
from a location within 200 ft of plot center. Obtain the azimuth and horizontal distance from
the "offset" location to plot center. If a PLGR unit is used use the Rng-Calc function in the
PLGR to compute the coordinates of the plot center (see PLGR guide, separate document).
If another type of GPS unit is used, record the azimuth and horizontal distance in Items
35,36.
Coordinates may be collected further than 200 feet away from the plot center if a laser
measuring device is used to determine the horizontal distance from the "offset" location to
plot center. Again, if a PLGR unit is used, Use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to
compute the coordinates of the plot center. If another type of GPS unit is used, record the
azimuth and horizontal distance in Items 35,36.
In all cases try to obtain at least 180 readings before recording the coordinates.
Item 25--AK GPS location type (L)
Record the location type for the coordinates collected on the ground.
When collected: All GPS records
Field width: 1
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
39
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Type
LZ/TR
RP
PC
Subplot 2
Subplot 3
Subplot 4
Other
Description
Landing zone / Truck parking spot (required)
Reference point (required)
Plot center (PC)
Use only if PC not possible
Use only if PC not possible
Use only if PC not possible
Describe in Plot Level Notes/Location Record
Item 26—AK GPS UNIT TYPE (T)
Record the kind of GPS unit used to collect coordinates. If suitable coordinates cannot be
obtained, record 0.
When collected: All field visited plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code GPS UNIT TYPE
0
GPS coordinates not collected (requires GPS note)
1
Rockwell Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver (PLGR)
2
Other brand capable of field averaging (Magellan SportTrack Pro)
3
Other brands capable of producing files that can be post processed
4
Other brands not capable of field averaging or post processing
Item 27--AK GPS SERIAL NUMBER (ID/Ser#)
Record the last six digits of the serial number on the GPS unit used.
The six digit serial number is affixed to the front of the GPS, just above the directional
keypad.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE > 0
Field width: 6 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 000001 to 999999
Item 28--AK COORDINATE SYSTEM (C)
Record a code indicating the type of coordinate system used to obtain readings.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE > 0
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
1 Geographic coordinate system
40
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
Item 29--AK GPS latitude degrees (Lt)
Record the latitude degrees, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit
When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: +/- 140 feet
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 51-70
Item 30--AK GPS latitude minutes
Record the latitude decimal minutes, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit
When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: +/- 140 feet
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 00.000 – 59.999
Item 31--AK GPS longitude degrees (Long)
Record the Longitude degrees, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit
When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 140 feet
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 129 – 165
Item 32--AK GPS longitude minutes
Record the Longitude decimal minutes, as obtained from the waypoint saved in the GPS unit
When collected: When COORDINATE SYSTEM = 1
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: +/- 140 feet
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 00.000 – 59.999
Item 33--AK NUMBER OF READINGS (Num)
Record a 3-digit code indicating how many readings were averaged by the GPS unit to
calculate the plot coordinates. Collect at least 180 readings if possible.
The data recorder program requires that the number of averaged readings be entered. The
Magellan GPS units do not have a number of readings counter, instead it utilizes a timer.
The timer is displayed on the position screen. It displays in hours:minutes:seconds. The GPS
receiver collects one reading per second while averaging. To correctly enter the number of
readings in the data recorder, the time in minutes and seconds must be converted to number
of readings. Since the GPS unit collects 60 readings per minute of averaging crews must
remember to multiply the number of minutes by 60 and then add the number of seconds
41
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
shown to that result. For example, if the Magellan receiver averages for three minutes and
twelve seconds it will display 00:03:12. To convert this to number of readings multiply three
minutes by sixty and add twelve. 3 x 60 = 180 + 12 = 192. Crews would enter 192 into the
NUMBER OF READINGS field (in the data recorder program).
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1 or 2
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 001 to 999
Item 34--AK GPS ERROR (Err)
Record the error as shown on the GPS unit to the nearest foot. As described in Collecting
Readings on page 39, make every effort to collect readings only when the error is less than
or equal to 70 feet. However, if after trying several different times during the day, at several
different locations, this is not possible, record readings with an error of up to 999 feet.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1 or 2
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 000 to 070 if possible
071 to 999 if an error of less than 70 cannot be obtained
Item 35--AK GPS ELEVATION (Elevat)
Record the elevation above mean sea level of the plot center, in feet, as determined by GPS.
When collected: When GPS UNIT TYPE = 1, 2 or 4
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: +/- 280 ft
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: -00100 to 20000
CORRECTION FOR "OFFSET" LOCATION
As described in Collecting Readings (pg 39) , coordinates may be collected at a location
other than the plot center (an “offset” location). If a PLGR unit is used all offset coordinates
will be "corrected" back using the Rng/Calc function. If a GPS unit other than a PLGR is
used, then record Items 36 and 37.
Item 36--AK AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm)
Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the location where coordinates were collected to
actual plot center. If coordinates are collected at plot center, record 000.
When collected: When GPS UNIT = 2, 3 or 4 & GPS location type = 3
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance +/- 3 degrees
MQO: At least 99% of the time
42
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
Values: 000 when coordinates are collected at plot center
001 to 360 when coordinates are not collected at plot center
Item 37--AK DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist)
Record the horizontal distance in feet from the location where coordinates were collected to
the actual plot center. As described in Collecting Readings (page 39), if a Laser range finder
is used to determine DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER, offset locations may be up to 999 feet
from the plot center. If a range finder is not used, the offset location must be within 200 feet.
When collected: When GPS UNIT = 2, 3 or 4 & GPS location type = 3
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 6 ft
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 000 when coordinates are collected at plot center.
001 to 200 when a Laser range finder is not used to determine distance
201 to 999 when a Laser range finder is used to determine distance
Item 38--AK GPS notes
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular GPS record
being defined.
Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each individual GPS record (line).
When collected: As needed
Field width: 40
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: Words or abbreviated sentences
- RP INFO Accessible by entering “Plot lvl data” from the Plot Menu.
Reference point (RP) data items
Record the following items which describe the RP and the course from the RP to the plot as
described In the RP section (page 19). These data items should match what is recorded on the
paper location record, and are etched into the tags affixed to the RP.
Item 39--AK RP type (T)Record the type of object chosen as the Reference Point (RP).
When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, or when in National Forest Wilderness all
plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, 2
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
43
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
Values:
Code
1
2
3
4
RP type
Tree or stump
Rock
Shrub
Other-specify in RP notes
Item 40--AK RP species (Spc)
If the RP is a tree or stump record it's species code.
When collected: When AK RP type = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
CODE SPECIES
011
Pacific silver fir
019
subalpine fir
042
Alaska yellow-cedar
094
white spruce
095
black spruce
098
sitka spruce
108
lodegepole pine
231
Pacific yew
CODE
242
263
264
351
375
746
747
SPECIES
western redcedar
western hemlock
mountain hemlock
red alder
paper birch
quaking aspen
black cottonwood
Item 41--AK RP diameter (Diam)
If the RP is a tree or stump, measure (or estimate) and record it's diameter to the nearest
inch.
When collected: When AK RP type = 1
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10%
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Value: 001-999
Item 42--AK RP azimuth (Azm)
Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the RP to the plot.
When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, or when in National Forest Wilderness all
plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, 2
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 4 degrees
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Value: 001-360
44
Annual Inventory 2005
V. PLOT LEVEL DATA
Item 43--AK RP horizontal distance (Dist)
Record, to the nearest foot, the horizontal distance from the face of the RP (basal tag, facing
plot center) to Plot Center (PC).
When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, or when in National Forest Wilderness all
plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, 2
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: +/- 5%
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Value: 0001-9999
Item 44--AK RP az/dist to subplot # (S)
Record the 1-digit number of the subplot which is referenced from the RP. Reference to
subplot 1 whenever possible.
When collected: All plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, or when in National Forest Wilderness all
plots with PLOT STATUS = 1, 2
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 4
Item 45--AK RP notes
Record notes to explain any special RP situation that may need clarification for future plot
visits. (ie. shrub species, height/size of rock, etc.) Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can
enter a note for each individual RP record (line).
When collected: When needed to describe a special situation with the plot RP
Field width: 40
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Value: Single words or abbreviated sentances
45
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
VI. CONDITION CLASS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A. DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS……………………………………..47
B. CONDITION CLASS STATUS DEFINITIONS……………………………………48
1. Accessible forest land
2. Nonforest land
3. Noncensus water
4. Census water
C. CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES……………………………………………….51
D. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES
DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS……………………………….……………51
Five exceptions size and width requirements
E. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES
WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND…………………………………………..58
1. Distinct boundary within a subplot or microplot
2. Indistinct boundary within a subplot
3. A boundary or transition zone between fixed radii
plots that sample distinctly different condition classes
4. Riparian forest area
F. ANCILLARY (NON-DELINEATING) VARIABLES………………………………..65
OWNER CLASS
PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS
ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES
STAND AGE
DISTURBANCE (up to 3 coded)
DISTURBANCE YEAR (1 per disturbance)
TREATMENT (up to 3 coded)
TREATMENT YEAR (1 per treatment)
PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS
NONFOREST MAPPING RULES
PRESENT NONFOREST LAND
USE………………………………………………………………………………73
46
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
VI. CONDITION CLASS
The Forest Inventory and Analyisis (FIA) plot is a cluster of four subplots in a fixed pattern.
Subplots are never reconfigured or moved in order to confine them to a single condition
class; a plot may straddle more than one condition class. Every plot samples at least one
condition class: the condition class present at plot center (the center of subplot 1)
A. DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS
Step 1: Delineate the plot area by CONDITION CLASS STATUS
The first attribute considered when defining a condition class is CONDITION CLASS
STATUS. The area sampled by a plot is assigned to condition classes based upon the
following differences in CONDITION CLASS STATUS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Accessible forest land
Nonforest land
Noncensus water
Census water
Nonsampled
Accessible forest land defines the population of interest for FIA purposes. This is the area
where most of the data collection is conducted.
NOTE: One additional attribute, PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE, is used to define all
nonforest condition classes in the sampled area on a plot. See Nonforest Land on page 49
and Item 26--AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE on page 73 for more information on
mapping requirements of Nonforest lands.
Step 2: Further subdivide Accessible Forest Land by 6 delineation variables
Any condition class sampled as accessible forest land may be further subdivided, in order of
listed priority, into smaller condition classes if distinct, contrasting condition classes are
present because of variation in any of the following attributes within the sampled area:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
RESERVED STATUS
OWNER GROUP
FOREST TYPE
STAND SIZE CLASS
REGENERATION STATUS
6. TREE DENSITY
No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting accessible forest land
condition classes. For each condition class recognized, several “ancillary attributes” that help
describe the condition will be collected, but these “ancillary attributes” will not be used for
delineation purposes.
47
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
B. CONDITION CLASS STATUS DEFINITIONS
1. Accessible forest land
Land that is within the population of interest, is accessible, is on a subplot that can be
occupied at subplot center, can safely be visited, and meets the following criteria:
• the condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees of any size or has been at least
10 percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest
use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular
mowing, intensive grazing, or recreation activities:
To determine stocking levels see “Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use
Classification” on page 168
To qualify as forest land, the prospective condition must be at least 1.0 acre in size and
120.0 feet wide measured stem-to-stem from the outer-most edge. Forested strips must
be 120.0 feet wide for a continuous length of at least 363.0 feet in order to meet the acre
threshold. Forested strips that do not meet these requirements are classified as part of the
adjacent nonforest land.
Transition zones and forest/nonforest encroachment - When an accessible forest land
condition encroaches into a nonforest condition, the border between forest and nonforest is
often a gradual change in tree cover or stocking with no clear and abrupt boundary. In
addition, it may be difficult to determine exactly where the forested area meets the
minimum stocking criteria and where it does not. For these cases, determine where the
land clearly meets the 10 percent minimum forest land stocking, and where it clearly is less
than required stocking; divide the zone between these points in half, and determine the
side of the zone on which the subplot center is located. Classify the condition class of the
subplot based on this line.
Example of classifying the condition class of the subplot in a
transition zone with forest/nonforest encroachment.
For example, at measurement time 1, a clear and distinct boundary existed between the
forest and nonforest condition classes. At time 2, however, there now exists a zone of
48
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
regeneration or small diameter trees between the previous forest condition and where the
nonforest clearly remains. If the zone of encroachment is clearly stocked where it meets
the nonforest, classify the entire zone as forest. If the zone is clearly nonforest up to the
original stand, call it all nonforest. If the encroachment or transition zone is not clearly
stocked where it meets the nonforest, determine where it is clearly stocked (forest) and
where it is clearly not stocked (nonforest); divide this zone in half, and classify the entire
subplot based on which side of the line the subplot center falls.
Treated strips – Occasionally, crews will come across plantations of trees, in which rows of
trees alternate with strips of vegetation that have been bulldozed, mowed, tilled, treated
with herbicide, or crushed. Because these strip treatments are conducted to optimize
growth or to release the stand, the areas are considered forest land, and the treatment is
considered a timber stand improvement operation. Do not confuse these practices with
similar treatments on nonforest lands such as yards or rights-of-way. Contact with the
landowner may help determine the intent of a treatment.
Indistinct boundary due to the condition minimum-width definition: Do not subdivide
subplots where a condition class may change due only to the forest vs. nonforest minimum
width (120.0 feet) definition. Although the point where the definition changes from forest to
nonforest creates an invisible “line” between conditions, this definitional boundary is not
distinct and obvious. See the figures below. Where the point of the definition change
occurs on the subplot, determine only if the subplot center is on the forest or nonforest side
of that approximate boundary, and classify the entire subplot based on the condition of the
subplot center. If the boundary crosses through the center of the subplot, classify the
subplot as the condition it most resembles. If the boundary occurs between subplots,
classify each subplot based on its relation to the definitional boundary.
Forest condition narrows within a
nonforest condition. Examine the location
of the subplot center in reference to the
approximate line where the forest
narrows to 120.0 feet wide. In this
example the entire subplot is classified
as forest.
Nonforest condition narrows within a
forest condition. Examine the location of
the subplot center in reference to the
approximate line where the non forest
narrows to 120.0 feet wide. In this
example the entire subplot is classified
as forest.
2. Nonforest land
Nonforest land is any land within the sample that does not meet the definition of accessible
forest land or any of the other CONDITION CLASS STATUS values defined in #’s 3, 4
(Noncensus - Census water) below. To qualify, the area must be at least 1.0 acre in size
49
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
and 120.0 feet wide, with 5 exceptions discussed in section D below. Do not consider
evidence of "possible" or future development or conversion. A nonforest land condition will
remain in the sample and will be examined at the next occasion to see if it has become
forest land.
On all field visited plots with an accessible forest land condition class, map all of the
nonforest condition classes present on the 24.0-foot fixed-radius at each established subplot.
Do not combine nonforest condition classes present. Example: if nonforest--urban land and
nonforest--cropland are both present within a 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map each nonforest
land use as a separate condition class. On subplots with no accessible forest land condition
classes within the 24.0-foot radius, record only the nonforest land use at the subplot center.
All Nonforest land condition classes are assigned a present nonforest land use code, see
Item 26--AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE on page 73.
Plots that are entirely nonforest fall into one of the following three categories:
1. The plot is field visited on the ground (AK Data source = 1 or 4).
AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected at each subplot center.
PC GPS coordinates are collected.
A plot file is created in the field data recorder.
If in National Forest Wilderness Vegetation Profile is collected
2. The plot is field visited and viewed from a distance (AK Data source = 1, 2, or 4)
AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected for each subplot center.
A plot file is created in the field data recorder.
3. The plot is not field visited. (AK Data source = 3 or 4)
AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE is collected for each subplot center.
A plot data file is created in the office.
3. Noncensus water
Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 1.0 acre to 4.5 acres in size. Rivers,
streams, canals, etc., 30.0 ft to 200 ft wide.
If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in Noncensus water and subplot center
cannot be safely occupied and installed, the entire subplot is considered Noncensus water
and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 3 (Noncensus
water). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other
subplots following normal procedures.
If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has Noncensus water present within
it's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the Noncensus water area as a separate condition
class. Use normal procedures to map and measure condition classes.
4. Census water
Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 4.5 ac in size and larger; and rivers,
streams, canals, etc., more than 200 ft wide (1990 U.S. Census definition).
If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in Census water and subplot center cannot
be safely occupied and installed, the entire subplot is considered Census water and is
classified as a condition class with CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 4 (Census water). No
50
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots
following normal procedures.
If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has Census water present within it's
24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the Census water area as a separate condition class. Use
normal procedures to map and measure condition classes.
C. CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES
A CONDITION CLASS NUMBER and a classification for CONDITION CLASS STATUS
are required for every condition class sampled on a plot. For each condition class
classified as accessible forest land, a classification is required for each of the following
attributes:
RESERVED STATUS
OWNER GROUP
FOREST TYPE
STAND SIZE CLASS
REGENERATION STATUS
TREE DENSITY
Attributes where a change causes
a separate condition class
OWNER CLASS
PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS
ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES
STAND AGE
DISTURBANCE (up to 3 coded)
DISTURBANCE YEAR (1 per disturbance)
TREATMENT (up to 3 coded)
TREATMENT YEAR (1 per treatment)
PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS
Ancillary - changes do not delineate
a new condition class
PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE
(use for all nonforest conditions, regardless of past condition).
When classifying CONDITION CLASS STATUS, OWNER GROUP, RESERVED STATUS,
and PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE, base the classification on what is present within
the area defined by the fixed radius plot (subplot or microplot).
All other variables including: FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS, REGENERATION
STATUS, STAND AGE, TREE DENSITY, DISTURBANCE, TREATMENT, and
PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS, should be determined over the entire condition, including but
not exclusive to what is encountered within the subplot/microplot fixed radius.
D. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION STATUS
The first step in delineated condition classes is to recognize differences in CONDITION
CLASS STATUS. The most common difference is adjacent accessible forest land and
nonforest land. Adjacent accessible forest land and nonforest land condition classes are
51
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
recognized only if each of the two prospective condition classes is at least 1.0 acre in size,
and each is at least 120.0 feet in width. These size and width minimums apply to both
accessible forest land and nonforest land.
Within an accessible forest land condition class, unimproved roads, rock outcrops, and
natural nonforest openings less than 1.0 acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width are
considered forest land and are not delineated and classified as separate nonforest condition
class.
Within a nonforest land condition class, forested areas or linear strips of trees less than 1.0
acre in size and less than 120.0 feet in width are considered part of the nonforest condition
class.
Five exceptions to these size and width requirements apply:
1. Developed nonforest condition: human-caused nonforest land condition classes such
as homes or cabins that are less than 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet in width and are
surrounded by forest land.
Developed nonforest conditions less than 120 feet wide or less than an acre in size cannot
fragment an otherwise forested condition into nonforest pieces. See the following three
diagrams used to help in “visually” explaining this rule (aka the “road as stopper rule”):
There are three kinds of developed nonforest inclusions that do not have to meet area or
width requirements:
a) Improved roads: paved roads, gravel roads, or improved dirt roads regularly
maintained for long-term continuing use. Unimproved traces and roads created
for skidding logs are not considered improved roads.
52
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
b) Maintained rights-of-way: corridors created for railroads, power lines, gas lines,
and canals that are periodically treated to limit the establishment and growth of
trees and shrubs.
Areas under powerlines are considered maintained right of way even if no
evidence of vegetation treatment is currently evident.
c) Developments: structures and the maintained area next to a structure, all less
than 1.0 acre in size and surrounded by forest land. Examples of developments
are houses or trailers on very small lots, communication installations in a small
cleared area within forest land, and barns and sheds.
2. Distinct, alternating strips of forest and nonforest land: this situation occurs when a
plot or subplot samples a condition class that is less than 1.0 acre in size and less than
120.0 feet in width. The condition class is one of a series of parallel strips of forest and
nonforest land in which none of the strips meet the minimum width requirement. This
exception applies only to nonforest conditions that are not listed under #1, e.g., improved
roads, maintained rights-of-way, and developments.
For many small intermingled strips, determine the total area that the alternating strips
occupy, and classify according to the CONDITION CLASS STATUS (forest land or
nonforest land) that occupies the greater area. If the area of alternating strips is so large
or indistinct as to make a total area determination impractical, then classify the sample
as forest land.
For two alternating strips of forest and nonforest between two qualifying areas of
nonforest land and forest land, see the figure next page. The figure delineates the
boundary between the forest and nonforest condition classes for four different examples.
The plot center defines the plot condition for all strips covered by the arrow. Any
subplot that falls in the alternating strips uses the rule. Any subplot that falls in assigned
nonforest / forest is assigned that type.
Nonforest land
greater than 120 ft
wide
Strip of Forest
less than 120 ft
wide
PC
Strip of
Nonforest less
than 120 ft wide
(and not cultural,
not a separate
condition)
Forest land
greater than 120 ft
wide
NF
PC
F
PC
NF
PC
F
Example of alternating strips of forested and non forested conditions
53
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
3. The 120.0 foot minimum width for delineation does not apply when a corner angle
is 90 degrees or greater.
Illustration of the 90 degree corner rule. The dotted lines do not create nonforest conditions.
4. Linear water features: natural water features that are linear in shape such as streams
and rivers. A linear water feature must meet the definition for Census or noncensus
water to be nonforest area. Therefore, a linear water feature must be at least 30.0 feet
wide and cover at least 1.0 acre. The width of a linear water feature is measured across
its channel between points on either side up to which water prevents the establishment
and survival of trees. To determine whether a linear water feature qualifies as nonforest,
rely on all available information on hand such as aerial photos, topographic maps, past
survey land calls, and ocular estimates at the current survey visit. Linear water features,
that do not meet the definition for Census or noncensus water should be classified as
forest land only if bounded by forest land on both shores. Crews are NOT expected to
measure the length of a linear water feature to determine if it meets the 1.0 acre
requirement; use professional judgment and common sense on any linear water feature.
A 30 ft wide stream needs to be 1452 ft long to be an acre in size.
5. Nonsampled conditions within accessible forest land are delineated, regardless of
size, as a separate condition.
Item 1--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER
On a plot, assign and record a number for each condition class. The condition class at plot
center (the center of subplot 1) is designated condition class 1. Other condition classes are
assigned numbers sequentially at the time each condition class is delineated.
In the condition class screen the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER will be shown in a row
across the top. Assign the appropriate values in the column below the appropriate
CONDITION CLASS NUMBER. The values entered below the CONDITION CLASS
NUMBER will be used to define the unique characteristics of each condition class
encountered on the plot.
When collected: All condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
54
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of time
Values: 1 to 9
Item 2--CONDITION CLASS STATUS (Cond Status)
Record the code that describes the status of the condition. The instructions in Section B and
C (above) apply when delineating condition classes that differ by CONDITION CLASS
STATUS.
When collected: All condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
CODE
CONDITION CLASS STATUS
1
Accessible forest land
2
Nonforest land
3
Noncensus water
4
Census water
5
Nonsampled
Item 3--AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON (CC NonS Rsn)
For portions of plots that cannot be sampled (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5), record one
of the following reasons.
When collected: When CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 5
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
01
02
03
Outside U.S. boundary – Assign this code to condition classes
beyond the U.S. border.
Denied access area – Any area within the sampled area of a
plot to which access is denied by the legal owner, or to which
an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot denies
access. There are no minimum area or width requirements for
a condition class delineated by denied access. Because a
denied-access condition can become accessible in the future,
it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next
occasion to determine if access is available. In some regions
denied access plots may be replaced; check with the field
supervisor regarding regional protocols for plot replacement.
Hazardous situation – Any area within the sampled area on
plot that cannot be accessed because of a hazard or danger,
for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance
55
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
10
11
plantations, temporary high water, etc. Although the hazard is
not likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains
in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to
determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum
size or width requirements for a condition class delineated by a
hazardous condition.
Other – This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is
not sampled due to a reason other than one of the specific
reasons listed. A field note is required to describe the situation.
Ocean - Plot falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line.
Where rivers or canals enter the ocean, ocean water begins
where the river/canal width exceeds ¼ nautical mile.
Denied access area
If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in an access denied area, the entire subplot is
considered access denied and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION
NONSAMPLED REASON = 2 (denied access area). No field measurements are made on
that subplot. Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures.
If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has access denied area present within
it's 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the access denied area as a separate condition class,
use normal procedures to map and measure condition class changes.
Hazardous situation
A plot or subplot is hazardous according to the crew's judgment. If a subplot center
(including subplot 1) lands in a hazardous area, the entire subplot is considered hazardous
and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 3
(hazardous situation). No field measurements are made on that subplot. Establish and
measure other subplots following normal procedures.
If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has hazardous area present within it's
24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the hazardous area as a separate condition class, do not
estimate, or 'rough in' tree, vegetation, or other data on the hazardous portion, and follow
normal field instructions to the extent safely possible to map and measure other condition
classes.
Ocean
If a subplot center (including subplot 1) lands in the ocean (as defined above), the entire
subplot is considered ocean area and is classified as a condition class with CONDITION
NONSAMPLED REASON = 11 (Ocean). No field measurements are made on that subplot.
Establish and measure other subplots following normal procedures.
If the center of a subplot is accessible, but the subplot has ocean area present within it's
24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map the ocean area as a separate condition class, use normal
procedures to map and measure condition class changes.
56
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
Item 4--AK estimated nonsample land cover type (CC NonS Lnd Cvr)
Record the land cover type that best represents the condition class, as determined from the
air, ground, or some format of remote sensing. Use your best judgement in estimating which
cover type is present. This estimation should be based on the plurality (majority) of the
cover type present for the entire condition area. Note: land cover type includes: Nonforest
(002), Noncensus water(003), and Census water(004).
When collected: When AK CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, or 10
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Values:
Code
002
003
004
122
125
Species Type
Nonforest land
Noncensus water
Census water
Spruce / Fir Group
white spruce
black spruce
264
268
270
271
Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock
Group
Pacific silver fir
subalpine fir
mountain hemlock
Alaska-yellow-cedar
281
Lodgepole Pine Group
lodgepole pine
301
304
305
Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group
western hemlock
western redcedar
Sitka spruce
703
Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group
cottonwood
901
902
Aspen / Birch Group
aspen
paper birch
911
Alder / Maple Group
red alder
57
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
E. DELINEATING CONDITION CLASSES WITHIN ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND
Accessible forest land is subdivided into condition classes that are based on differences
in RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS,
REGENERATION STATUS, and TREE DENSITY. Section A applies when delineating
contrasting forest condition classes. Specific criteria apply for each of the six attributes
and are documented by attribute in Items 5 to 10 (starting on page 61). “Stands” are
defined by plurality of stocking for all live trees that are not overtopped.
Additionally, each separate forest condition class recognized within accessible forest
land must be at least 1.0 acre in size and at least 120.0 feet in width. If prospective
contrasting forest land condition classes do not each meet these minimum size and width
requirements, the most similar prospective conditions should be combined until these
minimums are attained.
No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting condition classes within
accessible forest land. For each condition class recognized, many “ancillary attributes”
that help describe the condition will be collected, but will not be used for delineation
purposes (see Items 11-25 starting on page 65).
General instructions for delineating condition classes within accessible forest lands:
1. Distinct boundary within a subplot or microplot: Separate condition classes ARE
recognized if, within a subplot, two (or more) distinctly different condition classes
are present and delineated by a distinct, abrupt boundary. The boundary is
referenced, see Subplot Mapping on page 87.
2. Indistinct boundary within a subplot: Separate condition classes are NOT
recognized if the prospective condition classes abut along an indistinct transition
zone, rather than on an abrupt, obvious boundary. Only one condition is
recognized, and the subplot is classified entirely as the condition it most
resembles.
Example: The four subplots all sample only accessible forest land. Subplots 1,
3, and 4 sample what is clearly a stand of large diameter trees. Subplot 2 falls
in the middle of a stand size transition zone. In the zone, the large diameter
stand phases into a sapling stand.
Subplot 2 must not be divided into two condition classes on the basis of stand
size. Instead, it is treated entirely as part of the large diameter condition class
or is assigned entirely to a new condition class that is classified as a
seedling/sapling stand. The latter occurs only if the crew thinks the entire
subplot is more like a stand of seedlings/saplings than a stand of large
diameter trees; then the boundary between the large and small diameter
stands is assumed to occur between and not on the subplots.
58
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
3. A boundary or transition zone between fixed radii plots that sample distinctly
different condition classes: Separate condition classes are recognized and
recorded when a valid attribute obviously differs between two fixed radius plots,
but a distinct boundary or indistinct transition zone exists outside the sampled
(fixed-radius) area of the subplots. In such cases, a boundary, if present, is not
referenced.
Example: The northernmost subplot (2) samples entirely accessible forest
land. The other three subplots, 1, 3, and 4, fall clearly in a nonforest meadow.
Between subplot 1 and 2 is a transition zone; the number of trees present goes
from none to what clearly represents at least 10-percent tree stocking. Two
condition classes are sampled: accessible forest land sampled on subplot 2,
and nonforest land sampled on the other subplots.
4. Riparian forest area: A riparian forest area is defined as a forest area between
30.0 and 120.0 feet wide, and 1.0 acre or more in size, cumulative, but not
necessarily present on both sides of and adjacent to a naturally occurring or
artificially created body of water or watercourse with continuous or intermittent
flow. Riparian forest areas may be associated with but not limited to streams,
rivers, lakes, sloughs, seeps, springs, marsh, beaver ponds, sink holes, cypress
domes and ponds, man-made ditches and canals. A riparian forest area must
be associated “within forest” and contain at least one distinct and obvious
change in a condition class delineation attribute from its adjacent accessible
forest land condition class.
Note: When the width of forest adjacent to a stream is between 120.0 feet and
150.0 feet and the width of the riparian forest is at least 30.0 feet wide, the rules
for identifying the non-riparian forest (at least 30.0 feet but less than 120.0 feet)
need to be modified. The non-riparian forest can be between 30.0 feet and 120.0
feet and mapped as a separate condition as long as it meets the criteria for
delineating a separate condition class, otherwise it will be an inclusion in the
riparian forest condition class.
A riparian area (ie. a band of alder trees along a creek within a Sitka spruce
condition class) is typically different from the surrounding forest because of forest
type. However, a change in any of the 6 condition class delineating variables
makes the riparian area a candidate for a riparian area condition class. A riparian
condition class only needs to be at least 30.0 feet wide instead of the standard
120.0 feet. It still must be at least 1.0 ac in size, and must be surrounded by
forest on at least one side.
An area 30 feet wide needs to be 1452 feet long to be an acre in size. An area 60 feet
wide needs to be 726 feet wide, and an area 90 feet wide needs to be 484 feet long.
59
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
If the stream is > 30.0 feet wide, forest
type B is a separate condition class
(riparian) if either of the two widths of
the bands falls between 30.0 feet and
120.0 feet wide and is > 1.0 acre in size.
Forest type B is a separate condition
class (riparian) if the band of it is
between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide,
and is > 1.0 acre in size.
If the stream is < 30.0 feet wide, forest
type B is a separate condition class
(riparian) if the sum of the two widths of
the bands falls between 30.0 feet and
120.0 feet wide, and is > 1.0 acre in size.
Forest type B is a separate condition
class (riparian) if the band of it is
between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide,
and is > 1.0 acre in size.
In a non-forested area, a band of
forest type B that is < 120.0 feet wide
is NOT considered a riparian area.
It is not a separate condition class at
all.
Forest type B is a separate condition
class (riparian) if the band of it is
between 30.0 feet and 120.0 feet wide,
60
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
Item 5--RESERVED STATUS (Resv Status)
Record the code that identifies the reserved designation for the condition. Reserved land is
withdrawn by law(s) prohibiting the management of land for the production of wood products
(not merely controlling or prohibiting wood harvesting methods). Such authority is vested in
a public agency or department, and supersedes rights of ownership. The prohibition against
management for wood products cannot be changed through decision of the land manager
(management agency) or through a change in land management personnel, but is
permanent in nature.
Such areas include Congressional designated wilderness areas, National Parks, state parks,
or other lands protected by law or deed.
The value for this variable should be preloaded (for condition class 1). However, check to be
sure the value is correct for the plot.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Reserve Status
0
Not reserved
1
Reserved
Item 6--OWNER GROUP (Own Group)
Record the OWNER GROUP code identifying the ownership (or the managing Agency for
public lands) of the land in the condition class. Conditions will be delineated based on
changes in OWNER GROUP only; separate conditions due to changes in OWNER GROUP
are recognized only where differences can be clearly identified on the ground when visiting
the plot.
The value for this field should be preloaded (for condition class 1). However, check to be
sure the value is correct for the plot.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Owner Group
10
Forest Service
20
Other Federal
30
State and Local Government
40
Private
Item 7--FOREST TYPE
Record the code corresponding to the FOREST TYPE that best describes the species with
the plurality of stocking for all live trees in the condition class that are not overtopped.
If STAND SIZE CLASS is nonstocked, then FOREST TYPE is determined by the following
hierarchy:
61
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
•
•
For SAMPLE KIND = 2 plots (remeasured plot), record the FOREST TYPE of the
condition at the previous inventory.
For all other plots:
1. Evaluate any seedlings available to determine the FOREST TYPE.
2. If no seedlings exist, use adjacent stands and your best professional judgment
to determine FOREST TYPE.
Remeasurement Note: Previous (periodic) data has been translated to develop a “forest
type” from initial measurements. This data will be available on the print outs in the plot folder.
Crews should use the previous forest type as an aid, and should not count on it being 100%
accurate. Certain past conditions (Krummholz, multiple species, etc.) may not reflect current
forest types. If a previous forest type is “000” then there is likely to be several possible
conifer species (mixed) in the condition. Also, there should be a note on the print out if a
Krummholz condition is present on the plot.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: at least 95% of the time. No MQO when STAND SIZE CLASS=0
Values:
Code Species Type
Spruce / Fir Group
122 white spruce
125 black spruce
264
268
270
271
Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock
Group
Pacific silver fir
subalpine fir
mountain hemlock
Alaska-yellow-cedar
281
Lodgepole Pine Group
lodgepole pine
301
304
305
Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group
western hemlock
western redcedar
Sitka spruce
703
Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group
cottonwood
901
902
Aspen / Birch Group
aspen
paper birch
62
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
Code Species Type
Alder / Maple Group
911 red alder
Item 8--STAND SIZE CLASS (Stand Size)
Record the code that best describes the predominant size class of all live trees in the
condition class.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Stand Size Class
0
Nonstocked
1
< 4.9 inches
(seedlings, sapling)
2
5.0 - 8.9 in
(softwoods)
5.0 - 10.9 in
(hardwoods)
3
9.0 - 19.9 in
(softwoods)
11.0 - 19.9 in
(hardwoods)
4
20.0 - 39.9 inches
5
40.0 + inches
Definition
Meeting the definition of accessible forest land, and
the following applies:
Less than 10 percent stocked by trees of any
size, and not classified as cover trees (see code 6)
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown
cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees
of any size; and at least 2/3 of the crown cover is in
trees less than 5.0 inches d.b.h.
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown
cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees
of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in
trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality
of the crown cover is in softwoods between 5.0 - 8.9
inches diameter and/or hardwoods between 5.0 10.9 inches d.b.h.
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown
cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees
of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in
trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality
of the crown cover is in softwoods between 9.0 - 19.9
inches diameter and/or hardwoods between 11.0 19.9 inches d.b.h.
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown
cover if stocking tables are not available) in trees of
any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in
trees greater than 5.0 in d.b.h. and the plurality of the
crown cover is in trees between 20.0 - 39.9 in d.b.h.
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown
cover if stocking standards are not available) in trees
of any size; and at least 1/3 of the crown cover is in
trees greater than 5.0 inches d.b.h. and the plurality
of the crown cover is in trees > 40.0 inches d.b.h.
63
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
6
Cover trees (trees not
on species list, used
for plots classified as
nonforest)
Less than 10 percent stocking by trees of any size,
and greater than 5 percent crown cover of species
that comprise cover trees
The instructions in sections A and D (above) apply when delineating, on accessible forest
land, contrasting conditions based on differences in STAND SIZE CLASS.
Within the sampled area on a microplot or subplot recognize only very obvious contrasting
stands of different mean diameter with an abrupt boundary. Example: an obvious abrupt
boundary exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area of a subplot and demarcates a stand
size class change. Use tree stocking of all live trees that are not overtopped to differentiate
between stand-size classes.
Use crown cover as the surrogate for stocking to determine STAND SIZE CLASS. View
the plot from the top down and examine crown cover. The stand must have at least 5
percent of the crown cover in STAND SIZE CLASSES of 1,2,3,4, and 5 or any combination
of these STAND SIZE CLASSES; otherwise the STAND SIZE CLASS is 0. If 2/3 of the
crown cover is STAND SIZE CLASS=1, classify the condition as STAND SIZE CLASS=1. If
less than 2/3 of the crown cover is STAND SIZE CLASS=1, classify the condition as STAND
SIZE CLASS=2, 3, 4, or 5 based on which of these STAND SIZE CLASSES has the most
crown cover.,
Item 9--REGENERATION STATUS (Regen Status)
Record the code that best describes the artificial regeneration that occurred in the condition.
The instructions in Sections A and C (above)apply when delineating, within accessible forest
land, contrasting conditions based on differences in REGENERATION STATUS.
For a forest land condition to be delineated and/or classified as artificially regenerated, the
condition must show distinct evidence of planting or seeding. If it is difficult to determine
whether or not a stand has been planted or seeded, then use code 0. If no distinct boundary
exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area on any subplot, then do not recognize separate
conditions. In many regions of the West, trees are not planted in rows, and planted stands
do not differ in physical appearance from natural conditions. In these cases, there is no
need to differentiate conditions based on stand origin. Plot records or verbal evidence from
landowner is acceptable for determining regeneration status.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Artificial Regeneration Description
Present stand shows no clear evidence of artificial
0
Natural
regeneration. Includes unplanted, recently cut lands.
Present stand shows clear evidence of artificial
1
Artificial
regeneration.
64
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
Item 10--TREE DENSITY
Record a code to indicate the relative tree density classification. Base the classification on
the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the
condition that are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined condition class TREE
DENSITY.
The instructions in sections A and C (above) apply when delineating, within accessible forest
land, contrasting conditions based on differences in TREE DENSITY.
Codes 2 and higher are used ONLY when all other attributes used to delineate separate
condition classes are homogenous, i.e. when a change in density is the ONLY difference
within what would otherwise be treated as only one forest condition. Otherwise, code 1 for
all condition classes. Codes 2 and higher are usually, but not always, used to demarcate
areas that differ from an adjacent area due to forest disturbance or treatment, e.g., a partial
harvest or heavy but not total tree mortality due to a ground fire. Delineation on density
should only be done when the less-dense condition is 50 percent or less as dense as the
more dense condition.
Do not distinguish between low-stocked stands or stands of sparse and patchy forest.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Tree Density
1
Initial density class
2
Density class 2 - density different than 1
3
Density class 3 - density different than 1 and 2
In order to qualify as a separate condition based on density, there MUST be a distinct, easily
observed change in the density of an area's tree cover or basal area.
Examples of valid contrasting conditions defined by differences in tree density are:
• The eastern half of an otherwise homogeneous, 20 acre stand has many trees killed by a
bark beetle outbreak,
or
• One portion of a stand is partially cut over (with 40 square feet basal area per acre) while
the other portion is undisturbed (with 100 square feet basal area per acre).
NOTE: In these examples, RESERVED STATUS, OWNER GROUP, FOREST TYPE,
STAND SIZE CLASS, and REGENERATION STATUS are the same.
F. ANCILLARY (NON-DELINEATING) VARIABLES
Item 11--OWNER CLASS
Record the OWNER CLASS code that best corresponds to the ownership (or the managing
Agency for public lands) of the land in the condition class. Conditions will NOT be delineated
65
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
based on changes in owner class. If multiple owner classes within an OWNER GROUP
occur on a single condition class, record the owner class closest to the plot center.
The value for this field should be preloaded (for condition class 1). However, check to be
sure the value is correct for the plot.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Owner Classes within Forest Service lands (Owner Group 10):
11
National Forest
12
National Grassland
13
Other Forest Service
Owner Classes within Other Federal lands (Owner Group 20)
21
National Park Service
22
Bureau of Land Management
23
Fish and Wildlife Service
24
Departments of Defense/Energy
25
Other Federal
Owner Classes within State and Local Government lands (Owner Group 30)
31
State
32
Local (County, Municipality, etc.)
33
Other Non Federal Public
Owner Classes within Private lands (Owner Group 40)
41
Corporate (Includes Native Corporations)
42
Non Governmental Conservation / Natural Resources Organization examples: Nature Conservancy, National Trust for Private Lands, Pacific
Forest Trust, Boy Scouts of America, etc.
43
Unincorporated Partnerships / Associations / Clubs – examples: Hunting
Clubs that own, not lease property, recreation associations, 4H, etc.
44
Native American (Indian) within reservation boundaries
45
Individual
Item 12--ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES (Regen Spc)
Record the species code of the predominant tree species for which evidence exists of
artificial regeneration in the stand. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting condition
classes are never delineated based on variation in this attribute.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (CONDITION CLASS STATUS
= 1) with evidence of artificial regeneration (REGENERATION STATUS = 1)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
66
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
CODE
011
019
042
094
095
098
108
231
SPECIES
Pacific silver fir
subalpine fir
Alaska yellow-cedar
white spruce
black spruce
sitka spruce
lodegepole pine
Pacific yew
CODE
242
263
264
351
375
746
747
SPECIES
western redcedar
western hemlock
mountain hemlock
red alder
paper birch
quaking aspen
black cottonwood
Item 13--STAND AGE
Record the average total age, to the nearest year, of the trees (plurality of all live trees not
overtopped) in the predominant STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition, determined using
local procedures. Record 000 for non-stocked stands.
An estimate of STAND AGE is required for every forest land condition class defined on a
plot. Stand age is usually highly correlated with stand size and should reflect the average
age of all trees that are not overtopped. Unlike the procedure for site tree age (TREE AGE
AT DIAMETER), estimates of STAND AGE should estimate the time of tree establishment
(e.g., not age at the point of diameter measurement). Note: For planted stands, estimate age
based on the year the stand was planted (e.g., do not add in the age of the planting stock).
This variable is typically calculated in the office using age tree data (collected in the Site
Tree chapter). However, forested conditions that do not have available age trees for boring
(i.e. seedling/small sapling), need to be estimated in the field by the crews. Use the following
methods for determining STAND AGE based on the availability of acceptable age trees:
For typical “tree size” forested conditions use the three age trees selected (see Site Tree
chapter) to get an average age for the condition. Make sure to add in the approximate
number of years that passed from germination until the tree reached the point of core
extraction on the bole (DBH) to determine the total age of the tree. Use the following chart to
determine years to add (to breast height age) by respective species. Remember, only use
this table for determining STAND AGE, do not apply this method when determining TREE
AGE AT DIAMETER in the Site Tree Information chapter.
Species
(351) red alder, (746) quaking aspen, (747) black cottonwood
(375) paper birch
All other species
Years to add
2
5
8
For seedling/sapling sized forested conditions count the number of whorls or branch nodes
to help in getting an estimate. If there is any other available information on the establishment
of the trees (i.e. talked to land owner and he/she tells when it was planted, changes visible
between certain air photo years) then use that information to help in determining the stand
age.
If a condition class is nonstocked (accessible forest), assign a STAND AGE of 000.
67
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
If tree cores are not counted in the field, but are collected for counting later in the office,
record 999. Be sure to go back and put the correct tree age in (for each of the site/age trees)
and use those ages to develop an “average” STAND AGE for the condition.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10%
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Values: 000 to 997, 999
Item 14--DISTURBANCE 1 (Dstrb 1)
Record the code corresponding to the presence of the following disturbances. Disturbance
can connote positive or negative effects. The area affected by any natural or human-caused
disturbance must be at least 1.0 acre in size. Record up to three different disturbances per
condition class from most important to least important as best as can be determined. This
attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in
this attribute.
For initial or remeasurement plots, the disturbance must be within the last 5 years.
The following disturbance codes require "significant threshold" damage, which implies
mortality and/or damage to 25 percent of all trees in a stand or 50 percent of an individual
species’ count. Additionally, some disturbances affect forests but initially may not affect tree
growth or health (e.g., grazing, browsing, flooding, etc.). In these cases, a disturbance
should be coded when at least 25 percent of the soil surface or understory vegetation has
been affected.
Code the general disturbance codes (ie. 10, 40, …) only if one of the more specific codes (ie.
11, 41, ..) does not apply.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Disturbance
Definition
None
no observable disturbance.
00
Insect damage
10
11
Insect damage to understory vegetation
12
Insect damage to trees, including seedlings and saplings
Disease damage
20
21
Disease damage to understory vegetation
22
Disease damage to trees, including seedlings and
saplings
Fire
crown or ground fire, prescribed or natural
30
31 ground fire
32 crown fire
animal damage
40
41 Beaver
includes flooding caused by beaver
42 Porcupine
68
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
43
44
45
46
50
51
52
53
54
55
60
70
80
deer/ungulate
bear
rabbit
domestic animal
or livestock
Weather
Ice
Wind
Flooding
Drought
Earth movement /
avalanches
Vegetation
unknown / unsure
/ other
human caused
damage
includes grazing
includes hurricane, tornado
weather induced
suppression, competition, vines
describe in plot notes
any significant threshold of human damage, not described in
the DISTURBANCE codes listed or in the TREATMENT
codes listed. Must include plot level note to describe further.
Item 15--DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 (Distrb1 Yr)
Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 1 occurred. If the disturbance occurs continuously
over a period of time, record 9999.
When collected: When DISTURBANCE 1 > 00
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance:+/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years
+/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: ≤ 5 years ago from the current measurement year, 9999
Item 16--DISTURBANCE 2 (Dstrb 2)
If a stand has experienced more than one disturbance, record the second disturbance here.
See DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions.
Item 17--DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 (Dstrb2 Yr)
Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 2 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for
coding instructions.
Item 18--DISTURBANCE 3 (Dstrb 3)
If a stand has experienced more than two disturbances, record the third disturbance here.
See DISTURBANCE 1 for coding instructions.
Item 19--DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 (Dstrb3 Yr)
Record the year in which DISTURBANCE 3 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for
coding instructions.
69
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
Item 20--TREATMENT 1
Forestry treatments are a form of disturbance. These human disturbances are recorded
separately here for ease of coding and analysis. The term treatment further implies that a
silvicultural application has been prescribed. This does not include occasional stumps of
unknown origin or sparse removals for firewood, Christmas trees, or other miscellaneous
purposes. The area affected by any treatment must be at least 1.0 acre in size. Record up
to three different treatments per condition class from most important to least important as
best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting conditions are
never delineated based on variation in this attribute.
For initial or remeasurement plots, the treatment must be within the last 5 years.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code
00
10
20
Treatment
None
Cutting
Site
preparation
30
Artificial
regeneration
40
Natural
regeneration
50
Other
silvicultural
treatment
Description
No observable treatment.
The removal of one or more trees from a stand.
Clearing, slash burning, chopping, disking, bedding, or other
practices clearly intended to prepare a site for either natural
or artificial regeneration.
Following a disturbance or treatment (usually cutting), a new
stand where at least 50% of the live trees present resulted
from planting or direct seeding.
Following a disturbance or treatment (usually cutting), a new
stand where at least 50% of the live trees present (of any
size) were established through the growth of existing trees
and/or natural seeding or sprouting.
The use of fertilizers, herbicides, girdling, pruning or other
activities (not already listed above) designed to improve the
commercial value of the residual stand, or chaining, which is
a practice used on western woodlands to encourage wildlife
forage.
Item 21--TREATMENT YEAR 1 (Trtmnt1 Yr)
Record the year in which TREATMENT 1 occurred.
When collected: When TREATMENT 1 > 00
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance:+/- 1 year for measurement cycles of 5 years
+/- 2 years for measurement cycles of > 5 years
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: ≤ 5 years ago from the current measurement year
70
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
Item 22--TREATMENT 2
If a stand has experienced more than one treatment, record the second treatment here. See
TREATMENT 1 for coding instructions, code 00 if none.
Item 23--TREATMENT YEAR 2 (Trtmnt2 Yr)
Record the year in which TREATMENT 2 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding
instructions.
Item 24--TREATMENT 3
If a stand has experienced more than two treatments, record the third treatment here. See
TREATMENT 1 for coding instructions, code 00 if none.
Item 25--TREATMENT YEAR 3 (Trtmnt3 Yr)
Record the year in which TREATMENT 3 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding
instructions.
Item 26--PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS (Physio Cl)
Record the code that best describes the PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS of the condition within
the plot area; land form, topographic position, and soil generally determine physiographic
class.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes (COND. CLASS STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 80% of the time
Values:
Xeric -- Sites that are normally low or deficient in moisture available to support
vigorous tree growth. These areas may receive adequate precipitation, but experience
a rapid loss of available moisture due to runoff, percolation, evaporation, etc.
Code Physiographic
Description
class
Ridge tops with thin rock outcrops and considerable
11
Dry Tops
exposure to sun and wind.
Slopes with thin rock outcrops and considerable
exposure to sun and wind. Includes most
12
Dry Slopes
mountain/steep slopes with a southern or western
exposure.
Sites with a deep, sandy surface subject to rapid loss
of moisture following precipitation. Typical examples
13
Deep Sands
include sand hills, sites along the beach and shores of
lakes and streams.
All dry physiographic sites not described above.
19
Other Xeric
Describe in condition class notes and on the location
record
71
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
Mesic -- Sites that have moderate but adequate moisture available to support vigorous
tree growth except for periods of extended drought. These sites may be subjected to
occasional flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation.
Code
21
22
23
24
25
29
Physiographic
class
Description
Flat or fairly level sites outside flood plains. Excludes
deep sands and wet, swampy sites.
Hills and gently rolling, undulating terrain and
Rolling Uplands associated small streams. Excludes deep sands, all
hydric sites, and streams with associated floodplains.
Moist slopes and coves with relatively deep, fertile
Moist Slopes and soils. Often these sites have a northern or eastern
Coves
exposure and are partially shielded from wind and sun.
Includes moist mountain tops and saddles.
Flood plains and bottomlands less than 1/4-mile in
width along rivers and streams. These sites are
Narrow
normally well drained but are subjected to occasional
Floodplains/
flooding during periods of heavy or extended
Bottomlands
precipitation. Includes associated levees, benches,
and terraces within a 1/4 mile limit. Excludes swamps,
sloughs, and bogs
Flood plains and bottomlands 1/4 mile or wider in
width along rivers and streams. These sites are
Broad
normally well drained but are subjected to occasional
Floodplains/
flooding during periods of heavy or extended
Bottomlands
precipitation. Includes associated levees, benches,
and terraces. Excludes swamps, sloughs, and bogs
with year-round water problems.
All moderately moist physiographic sites not described
Other Mesic
above. Describe in condition class notes and on the
location record.
Flatwoods
Hydric -- Sites that generally have a year-round abundance or over-abundance of
moisture. Hydric sites are very wet sites where excess water seriously limits both
growth and species occurrence.
Code Physiographic
Description
class
Low, wet, flat forested areas usually quite extensive
that are flooded for long periods of time except during
31
Swamps/Bogs
periods of extreme drought. Excludes cypress ponds
and small drains.
Narrow, stream-like, wet strands of forestland often
without a well-defined stream channel. These areas
32
Small Drains
are poorly drained or flooded throughout most of the
year and drain the adjacent higher ground.
72
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
33
Bays and wet
pocosins
34
35
Beaver ponds
Cypress ponds
39
Other hydric
Low, wet, boggy sites characterized by peaty or
organic soils. May be somewhat dry during periods of
extended drought. Examples include sites in the Lake
States with lowland swamp conifers or the Carolina
bays in the southeast US.
All other hydric physiographic sites. Describe in
condition class notes and on the location record.
Item 27--AK PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE (NonF Land Use)
Record the Present Nonforest Land Use for all nonforest conditions (CONDITION CLASS
STATUS = 2), or for nonsampled conditions (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 3) when the
estimated nonsample land cover type = 002 (nonforest), regardless of past condition. Use
the codes and classifications listed below.
On all visited plots with an accessible forest land condition class, map nonforest land
condition classes present on the 24.0-foot fixed-radius at each subplot.
If a subplot has an accessible forest land condition class present within the 24.0 foot radius,
map each nonforest land condition class present. Do not combine nonforest condition
classes. Example: if nonforest-urban land and nonforest-cropland are both present within a
24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, map each land class as a separate condition class.
If there are no accessible forest land condition classes present within a subplots 24.0-foot
radius, record only the nonforest condition class present at the subplot center. Do not
separate nonforest condition classes. Example: if nonforest-urban land and nonforestcropland are both present within a 24.0-foot fixed-radius plot, record only the condition class
which occupies the subplot center. An exception, always delineate any Census/Noncensus
water and/or Nonsampled.
See Nonforest land on page 49 for information on plots that are entirely
nonforest.
When collected: Record the PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE for all nonforest
conditions (COND. CLASS STATUS = 2), regardless of past condition. When
CONDITON CLASS STATUS = 5 (Non Sampled) and estimated nonsampled
land cover type = 2 (Nonforest land).
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Present nonforest
land use
10
Agricultural land
Definition
Land managed for crops, pasture, or other
agricultural use; the area must be at least 1.0 acre in
size and 120.0 feet wide. Use code 10 only for cases
not better described by one of the following
73
Annual Inventory 2005
VI. CONDITION CLASS
11
Cropland
12
Pasture
13
14
Idle farmland
Orchard
Christmas tree
plantation
15
20
Grass/forb/shrub land
30
Developed
31
Cultural or Urban
32
Rights-of-way
33
Recreation
Other
40
41
Naturally nonvegetated
42
Vegetated wetlands
ie. mint, wheat, rye, planted berry fields
Improved through cultural practices such as grading
and mowing
Land primarily composed of grasses, forbs, or shrubs
(not wetlands). This includes lands vegetated
naturally or artificially to provide a plant cover
managed like native vegetation and does not meet
the definition of pasture. The area must be at least
1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet Wide
Land used primarily by humans for purposes other
than forestry or agriculture. Use the code 30 only for
land not better described by one of the following:
Business, residential, and other places of intense
human activity
Improved roads, railway, power lines, maintained
canal
Parks, skiing, golf courses
Land parcels greater than 1.0 acre in size and greater
than 120.0 feet wide, that do not fall into one of the
uses described above or below. Examples include:
noncensus water, recent burns, etc.
Barren rock, sand, lava, glaciers (ice), undeveloped
beaches, glacial outwash
vegetated lands where at some period in the year,
the water table is usually at or near the surface, or
the land is covered by shallow water. Includes:
swamps, peatlands (bogs, fens, muskegs), marshes,
and tidal flats
Item 28--AK condition class notes
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Condition
Class being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key, you can enter a note for each
defined Condition Class record (column).
When collected: All plots, use when clarification is needed
Field width: 80
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences
74
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Subplot Attributes………………………………………………………….76
Invasive Species……………………………………………………………82
Subplot Mapping…………………………………………………………...87
Seedling Data………………………………………………………………92
75
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Each subplot is described by a series of area parameters relating to topographic features and
existing cover type. These data also relate to the microplot, since the microplot is contained
within the subplot perimeter.
Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER
Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.
This code will be pre-determined from the Plot Menu of the tally program by selecting
“chOOse subplot” and entering the appropriate subplot number (values shown in the table
below). When in the “Subplot Info” screen the subplot number will be shown above the data
entry column, verify that this is the correct subplot before entering data. The Subplot number
chosen using these directions prior to entering data for Subplot Attributes, Invasive Species,
Subplot Mapping, and Seedling Data, will be the subplot assigned to the respective data.
When Collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code
1
2
3
4
Subplot
center subplot
north subplot
southeast subplot
southwest subplot
-SUBPLOT ATTRIBUTESAccessible by entering “Subpl info” from the Plot Menu
Clarification for coding subplots
Examples for field coding of subplot plot status, nonsampled reason, estimated nonsample land
cover type, center condition, and condition status coding follow. The main thing to keep in mind
is that a subplot can be considered “sampled” even if the subplot center cannot be safely
occupied:
1. Unable to safely occupy subplot center because of census or noncensus water and there is
some forest on the subplot:
* forest/water boundary is ignored because crew cannot occupy subplot center.
subplot status = 2 (sampled, no accessible forest condition present on point)
subplot center condition = n (arbitrary condition class number)
condition status of condition = 3 for noncensus water or = 4 for census water
2. Unable to safely occupy subplot center because of hazard (e.g. over edge of cliff) and there is
some forest on the subplot:
76
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
* hazardous/accessible boundary ignored because crew cannot occupy subplot center.
subplot status = 3 (nonsampled)
subplot nonsampled reason = 3 (hazardous)
estimated nonsample land cover type = nnn (designated cover type from list of values)
subplot center condition = n (arbitrary condition class number)
condition status of condition n = 5 (nonsampled)
condition nonsampled reason = 3 (hazardous)
condition nonsample land cover type = nnn (designated cover type from list of values)
3. Able to safely occupy subplot center even though the center is in census or noncensus water
and there is some forest on the subplot:
* forest/water boundary is installed and forested portion of plot is measured because crew can
occupy subplot center.
subplot status = 1 (sampled, forest condition present on point)
subplot center condition = n (arbitrary condition class number)
condition status of condition = 3 for noncensus water or = 4 for census water
Item 2--SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS (Sbplt Status)
Indicate whether or not this subplot currently has at least one accessible forested condition
class.
When collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
1 Sampled – at least one accessible forest land condition present on subplot
2 Sampled – no accessible forest land condition present on subplot
3 Nonsampled
Item 3--AK SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (NonS Reason)
For entire subplots that cannot be sampled, record one of the following reasons.
When collected: When SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS = 3
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
01 Outside U.S. boundary – Assign this code to condition classes beyond the U.S. border.
02 Denied access area – Any area within the sampled area of a plot to which access is denied
by the legal owner, or to which an owner of the only reasonable route to the plot denies
access. There are no minimum area or width requirements for a condition class delineated
by denied access. Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the future,
it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if access is
available.
77
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
03 Hazardous situation – Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed
because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines, illegal substance
plantations, temporary high water, etc. Although the hazard is not likely to change over
time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion
to determine if the hazard is still present. There are no minimum size or width requirements
for a condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.
04 Time limitation – This code applies to full subplots that cannot be sampled due to a time
restriction. This code is reserved for areas with limited access, and in situations where it is
imperative for the crew to leave before the plot can be completed (e.g., scheduled
helicopter rendezvous). Use of this code requires notification to the field supervisor. This
code should not be used for an entire plot (use code 8 (skipped visit, Plot level data) when
an entire plot is skipped).
05 Lost data – The plot data file was discovered to be corrupt after a panel was completed and
submitted for processing. This code is assigned to entire plots or full subplots that could not
be processed, and is applied at the time of processing after notification to the region. Note:
This code is for office use only.
10 Other – This code is used whenever a plot or condition class is not sampled due to a
reason other than one of the specific reasons already listed. A field note is required to
describe the situation.
11 Ocean - Plot falls in ocean water below the mean high tide line. Where rivers or canals
enter the ocean, ocean water begins where the river/canal width exceeds ¼ nautical mile.
Item 4--AK estimated nonsample land cover type (NonS Land Cvr)
Record an estimate of what cover type has plurality over the entire subplot area. This
variable is only available when SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, 4, or 10 . For
example: if the subplot is nonsampled because of hazardous conditions (as would be
entered 03 in SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON above), but the subplot area is stocked
with mountain hemlock, then enter 270 for the “estimated nonsample land cover type”. Note:
land cover type includes: Nonforest (002), Noncensus water(003), and Census
water(004).
When collected: When SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON = 2, 3, 4, or 10
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors in group or type
MQO: at least 95% of the time in type
Values
Code Land Cover Type
002
Nonforest
003
Noncensus water
004
Census water
Spruce / Fir Group
122
white spruce
125
black spruce
264
268
Fir / Spruce / Mountain Hemlock
Group
Pacific silver fir
subalpine fir
78
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Code Land Cover Type
270
mountain hemlock
271
Alaska-yellow-cedar
281
Lodgepole Pine Group
lodgepole pine
301
304
305
Hemlock / Sitka Spruce Group
western hemlock
western redcedar
Sitka spruce
703
Elm / Ash / Cottonwood Group
cottonwood
901
902
Aspen / Birch Group
aspen
paper birch
911
Alder / Maple Group
red alder
Item 5--SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION
Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the subplot center.
SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION is selected from the Plot Menu (cc at centeR) prior to
entering the Subplot information screen.
When collected: All subplots on established plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
Item 6--MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (Microplot Cond)
Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the microplot center.
When collected: All microplots where subplot center is COND. CLASS STATUS = 1, 2, 3
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
Item 7--SUBPLOT SLOPE (Slope)
Record the angle of slope across the 24.0 ft radius subplot to the nearest 1 percent.
SUBPLOT SLOPE is determined by sighting the clinometer along a line parallel to the
average incline (or decline) of each subplot. This angle is measured along the shortest
pathway down slope before the drainage direction changes. To measure SUBPLOT
79
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
SLOPE, Observer 1 should stand at the uphill edge of the subplot and sight Observer 2, who
stands at the downhill edge of the subplot. Sight Observer 2 at the same height as the eyelevel of Observer 1. Read the slope directly from the percent scale of the clinometer.
•
•
•
•
If slope changes gradually across the subplot, record an average slope.
If slope changes across the subplot but the slope is predominately of one direction, code
the predominant slope percentage rather than the average.
If the subplot falls directly on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the
average slope of the side hill(s).
If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies
on one side hill, code the slope of the side hill where most of the area lies.
When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on
subplot (SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS = 1)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10%
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 000 to 155
Item 8--SUBPLOT ASPECT (Aspect)
Record the aspect across the 24.0 ft radius subplot, to the nearest 1-degree. SUBPLOT
ASPECT is determined along the direction of slope for land surfaces with at least 5 percent
slope in a generally uniform direction. SUBPLOT ASPECT is measured with a hand
compass along the same direction used to determine slope.
• If aspect changes gradually across the subplot, record an average aspect.
• If aspect changes across the subplot but the aspect is predominately of one direction,
code the predominate direction rather than the average.
• If the subplot falls on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top, code the aspect
of the ridgeline or canyon bottom.
• If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top, but most of the area lies
on one side hill,
code the aspect of the side hill.
When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on
subplot (SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS = 1)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values:
Code Aspect
000
no aspect, slope < 5 percent
001
1 degree
002
2 degrees
*
*
*
*
360
360 degrees, due north
80
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Item 9--SNOW/WATER DEPTH (Snow/Water Dept)
Record to the nearest 0.1 foot. the average approximate depth of water, snow, or ice
covering the 24.0 ft radius subplot at the time of data collection. This variable is used to
indicate plots where some variables (e.g. seedling count, total lengths) may be measured
with less certainty due to conditions at the time of measurement.
This item is intended for water/snow/ice which covers substantial portions of subplots. Do
not record the depth of streams or other water sources if contained within their established
banks and are not affecting tree or vegetation measurements.
When collected: All subplots with at least one accessible forest land condition present on
subplot (SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS=1)
Field width: 2 digits (x.y)
Tolerance: +/- 0.5 ft
MQO: at the time of measurement (no MQO after initial date of visit)
Values: 0.0 to 9.9
Item 10--VEGETATION COMMUNITY DESCRIPTION for Label
To fully automate Specimen Label, enter a brief description of the community type to aid
taxonomist in the identification of any specimens collected from this subplot. Community
descriptions often describe the dominant overstory species (i.e.: Open mixed conifer, closed
paper birch, alder-willow shrub, bearberry tundra)
Note: This variable does not need to be collected if there is no Invasive Species (or
suspected Invasive Species) encountered on the subplot. See -Invasive Plant Speciessection below.
When collected: If an Invasive Species (or suspect Invasive Species) is recorded on the
subplot.
Field width: 40 characters
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99 % of the time
Values: English words or phrases that describe plant community
Item 11--AK subplot notes
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation encountered on the
Subplot.
Accessible by pushing the F4 key while in the Subplot Information screen
When collected: As needed
Field width: 40
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentances
81
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
- INVASIVE PLANT SPECIES Accessible by selecting “Subpl Info” in the Plot Menu
Non-native invasive plants displace native vegetation, degrade wildlife habitat, and negatively
affect human health, the economy, and the environment. Factors such as geographic isolation
and harsh winters have protected Alaska from large-scale invasive plant infestations in the past.
Recently, however, some of the most harmful noxious weeds of the lower 48 states have begun
to grow and spread in Alaska.
Occasionally, invasive species data will be collected on a plot that also requires VEGETATION
PROFILE (P2 VEG Profile [wilderness only]), and/or VEGETATION DIVERSITY AND
STRUCTURE (P3 VEG [wilderness and non-wilderness]). In these cases, all crew members
involved in vegetation measurements should work closely to capture the full list (if any) and
percent cover of all invasives encountered on the 24.0 foot radius plot.
The invasive species protocol will be followed for all accessible ground visited plots that fall in
the Alaska Coastal Annual unit. At each subplot a quick search will be conducted to identify all
targeted plants, regardless of cover, that are either rooted or overhang within the 24.0 foot
radius. If invasive plants are detected, an estimate of the percent cover within the subplot will
be made.
Invasive plant data collection will occur on all accessible subplots, regardless of whether the
condition is forest or nonforest. Invasive plant species data are not collected on hazardous,
access denied, out of unit, or water [ocean, census/non-census] subplots.
Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER
Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.
This code will be pre-determined from the Plot Menu of the allegro program by selecting
“chOOse subplot” and entering the appropriate subplot number (values shown in the table
below). When in the “Subplot Invasives” screen the subplot number will be shown in the
upper right end of the top row. Make sure that this is the correct subplot before entering data.
When collected: All Subplots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code
1
2
3
4
Subplot number
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
--VEGETATION COMMUNITY DESCRIPTION for Specimen Label
This variable must be filled out in the Subplot Attributes screen accessible by entering “Subpl
Info” from the Plot Menu. For a complete description of this variable see Item 10 on page 81.
This variable does not need to be collected if there is no Invasive Species (or suspect Invasive
Species) encountered on the subplot.
82
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Item 2--SPECIES (NRCS CODE)
Each species record must have a valid species code recorded (see values below). If a plant
is suspected to be invasive, and may or may not be one of the species listed below, and
cannot be identified to species in the field, enter the unknown symbol of “2PLANT”.
NOTE: Collect a voucher specimen for any recorded species.
When Collected: All Accessible Subplots where listed species are observed.
Field Width: 10 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
CODE
PLANTS Species
Common
ALPE4
Garlic mustard
Alliaria petiolata
BRIN2
Smooth brome
Bromus inermis
BRTE
Downy brome, cheatgrass
Bromus tectorum
CABU2
Shepard’s purse
Capsella bursa-pastoris
CAAR18
Siberian peashrub
Caragana arborescens
CEBI2
Spotted knapweed
Centaurea biebersteinii
CIAR4
Canada thistle
Cirsium arvense
CIVU
Bull thistle
Cirsium vulgare
CRTE3
Narrowleaf hawksbeard
Crepis tectorum
CYSC4
Scotchbroom
Cytisus scoparius
DAGL
Orchard grass
Dactyllis glomerata
ELRE4
Smooth brome
Elymus repens
GALEO
Hempnettle
Galeopsis sp.
HIAU
Orange hawkweed
Hieracium aurantiacum
HIPI
Mouseear hawkweed
Hieracium pilosella
HICA10
Meadow hawkweed
Hieracium caespitosum
HIUM
Narrowleaf hawkeed
Hieracium umbellatum
HOJU
Foxtail barley
Hordeum jubatum
HYRA3
Hairy catsear
Hypochaeris radicata
Ornamental jewelweed,
IMGL
Impatiens glandulifera
Himalayan balsam
LASQ
Bluebur
Lappula squarrosa
LEVU
Oxeye daisy
Leucanthemum vulgare
Common toadflax,
LIVU2
Linaria vulgaris
Butter and eggs
LOLIU
Ryegrass
Lolium sp.
MADI6
Pineapple weed
Matricaria discoidea
MEDIC
Alfalfa
Medicago sp.
MEAL12
Sweetclover, white
Melilotus alba
MEOF
Sweetclover, yellow
Melilotus officinalis
PHAR3
Reed canarygrass
Phalaris arundinacea
PHPR3
Timothy
Phleum pratense
PLMA2
Plantain
Plantago major
83
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
POAV
POCU6
PRPA5
RARE3
SEJA
SEVU
SOAR2
STME2
TAOF
TAVU
TRDU
TRIFO
VICRC
2PLANT
Prostrate knotweed
Polygonum aviculare
Japanese knotweed
Polygonum cuspidatum
European bird cherry
Prunus padus
Creeping buttercup
Ranunculus repens
Tansy ragwort
Senecio jacobaea
Common groundsel
Senecio vulgaris
Perennial sowthistle
Sonchus arvensis
Common chickweed
Stellaria media
Dandelion
Taraxacum officinale
Common tansy
Tanacetum vulgare
Western salsify
Tragopogon dubius
Clover
Trifolium sp.
Bird vetch
Vicia cracca
Place holder for suspect invasive plant
Item 3--PERCENT COVER
A rapid canopy cover estimate is made for each species for all invasive species foliage
across all layer heights. Canopy cover is based on a vertically-projected polygon described
by the outline of the foliage, ignoring any normal spaces occurring between the leaves of the
plant (Daubenmire 1959). Canopy cover is estimated as a percentage of the entire 24-ft
radius subplot. In cases where the subplot is not fully accessible (access denied,
hazardous, water, etc.), record the percent cover on the accessible portions as if the subplot
was 100% accessible. That is, if cover is about equal to a circle with a radius of 5.3 ft, enter
5%, as you would for a fully forested subplot, on any partially forested subplot. This situation
applies for dealing with portions of a plot that may be inaccessible.
If cover is greater than 0% but less than 1%, enter “t” for trace. For species of moderate
cover, it may be easiest to divide the subplots into quarters, estimate canopy cover of each
quarter separately, and then add them together. The following area-cover sizes may be
useful in developing estimates for an entirely forested subplot:
Subplot radius = 24.0 feet, Subplot area = 1809 ft2
Length of a side of a Radius of circular
Cover Area (ft2)
square(ft)
area(ft)
1%
18
4.3
2.4
3%
54
7.4
4.1
5%
90
9.5
5.3
10%
181
13.4
7.6
20%
362
19
10.7
When collected: For every SPECIES record
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 class based on the following canopy cover classes: t, 1-5%, 6-10%, 1120%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: at least 90% of the time
Values: t, 001 to 100
84
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Item 4--UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER
When any code is entered for the first time on a plot, the UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER is “1”.
If more than one unidentified species is discovered that is described by “2PLANT”, the next
sequential number is assigned. If a recorded unidentified species is encountered again
elsewhere on the plot, the Vegetation Specialist must record the UNIQUE SPECIES
NUMBER that corresponds to the earlier encountered specimen.
When collected: All species records.
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: 1-99, assigned in sequential numbers
Item 5--SPECIMEN OFFICIALLY COLLECTED
Record if a specimen was collected or not for each invasive species observed, including
unknown codes entered as a new unique species.
When collected: For all codes.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
1
Yes, a specimen was officially collected
0
No, a specimen was not officially collected
Item 6--SPECIMEN LABEL NUMBER
Record the label number for the collected specimen. Numbered labels are provided to each
vegetation specialist by your regional coordinator.
When collected: SPECIMEN OFFICIALLY COLLECTED = 1
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 99999, as pre-printed and assigned by region.
Item 7--SPECIMEN NOT OFFICIALLY COLLECTED REASON CODE
Record the code that describes why a specimen has not been collected. Because we want
voucher specimens collected, there are only a few reasons not to collect:
When collected: SPECIMEN COLLECTED = 0
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
85
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Code
03
04
06
10
Description
Hazardous situation
Time limitation
Specimen collected for immediate/local identification only
Other - explain in notes
Item 8--AK INVASIVE PLANT NOTES
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Invasive
Species record being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key.
When collected: As needed and when SPECIMEN NOT COLLECTED REASON = 10.
Field width: 40
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentences
VOUCHER SPECIMEN COLLECTION
When you encounter a plant species suspected to be a listed invasive species, collect a voucher
specimen, following these basic steps:
Use a digging tool to extract the entire plant, including any underground portions, flowers, fruits,
and leaves. If the plant is abundant, collection of two samples will increase the likelihood of a
good specimen. If it’s an edible species, collect as much as possible for Misha’s dinner salad.
Collected specimens should be transported in the field and from the field in the 1 and/or 2 gallon
zip-lock bags provided. Only one species and label may be placed in a single bag. Acceptable
methods of transporting collected specimens include:
•
Use a 3-hole-punch to punch holes in the bottom of your bags prior to traveling in the
field. Place the punched bags into a 2-inch 3-ring binder with the zip-lock portion
facing outward. Plants can then be placed with labels into the bag directly in the
binder. This method prevents crumpling, tearing, and destroying the specimen during
transportation.
•
Use a 1-hole-punch to punch a hole in the one upper corner of each bag. The hole
should be placed in such a manner that it cannot easily be torn. Place the bags on an
aluminum carabineer (available at drug stores) or on heavy twine and fasten to your
field vest or backpack. Be careful to seal the plants and labels securely inside the
bags to prevent accidental loss.
A set of pre-printed labels for unknown specimens (Figure X.1) will be available for
crews. A Pre-printed label will be placed in the bag with the specimen. Record the preprinted label number corresponding to the voucher specimen in Item 7. Full labels will be
printed in the office from downloaded PDR data. Properly used labels are essential for
tracking specimens and updating species records.
86
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Label Number:1
SPECIES CODE:
P3Hexagon: ………
Plot: 1
Subplot: 1
P3Quad:
Date: 8/06/03
Unknown Code:ACANT2 Unique Species Nbr:1
Veg Spec. crew: John Doe
State: MN
County: Hubbard
Community: Spruce-Fir
Notes: opposite leaves, square stem, purple
flowers, minty fragrance, possibly peppermint
Figure X.1. Example of label for unknown specimen.
5.
Press and label if not identified by the end of the day
1. Each specimen representing a unique species should be placed individually inside a
single layer of folded newsprint. Each specimen is to be accompanied by its
corresponding specimen label. Small plant specimens are to be pressed individually.
Large plant specimens may be folded in a “v”, “z”, or “w” arrangement to fit on a single
newsprint page. Arrange the specimen so that at least one upper and one lower leaf
surface is exposed. Plants may be trimmed to reduce bulk, so long as all diagnostic
parts are included. Diagnostic portions include stem sections, petioles, leaves, roots,
flowers, and fruits. Bulky fruits or nuts may be stored separately in a paper envelope that
is taped to the newsprint and is accompanied by an identical copy of the specimen’s
unknown label. Species codes can be written on the outside of the folded newspaper to
aid sorting as specimens are processed.
2. Stack the specimens in their individual newsprint sleeves between two pieces of
cardboard. Bind the cardboard and plants together using a piece of twine or flat cloth
ribbon wrapped around the length and width of the cardboard bundle. For mailing
numerous specimens, several bundles may be used. Place all bundles inside a
cardboard box for shipping.
Package and submit specimens as dictated by your region or lab.
All packaged specimens are to be accompanied by a legible completed label. Unknown reports
tracking collected plants are generated from the PDR plot file.
- SUBPLOT MAPPING Accessible by selecting Subpl info in the Plot Menu.
BOUNDARY REFERENCES
Boundary reference data are used to compute the area for the condition classes sampled on a
plot and to remeasure plots. Record all boundaries between condition classes that occur within
the sampled (fixed-radius) area on subplots and microplots. Boundaries outside sampled (fixedradius) areas are not referenced.
87
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
In addition to using the recording procedures described herein, sketch maps of condition class
boundaries onto the pre-printed plot diagrams on paper field tally sheets.
BOUNDARIES ON REMEASUREMENT PLOTS
When re-visiting a plot that has previous boundary mapping of condition classes, it is important
not to be too critical of slight differences in azimuth and distance numbers. If the previous
mapping is generally similar to the current boundary configuration, then do not change previous
numbers. However, if there is a significant change in condition classes, a gross error by the
previous crew, or a change in the procedures from what was initially used; then apply the
appropriate AK CHANGE BOUNDARY code and enter the correct boundary data.
REFERENCE PROCEDURE
Reference, within the sampled area on each microplot and subplot the approximate boundary of
each condition class that differs from the condition classes at a subplot center. Trees selected
on these fixed-radius plots are assigned to the actual condition in which they lie regardless of
the recorded approximate boundary delineated.
Subplot boundary referencing is done by recording azimuths and distances from subplot center
to the reference points and/or from microplot center to the reference points (see examples on
page 91). Each boundary is marked by a maximum of three points - two where the boundary
intersects the subplot circumference or microplot circumference, and one "corner" point between
the two end points, if necessary. Only the corner point requires a distance, since the distance
from the center to the circumference is always equal to the fixed plot radius.
Microplot boundaries are referenced from the microplot center
Refer to section A on page 47 and section D page 51 for the general condition class delineation
guidelines. For Condition class status (B) and Accessible Forest Land (E) on pages 48 and 58.
The following additional rules apply when referencing a boundary within a subplot or microplot:
1.
When a boundary between accessible forest land and nonforest land or between two
contrasting accessible forest land condition classes is clearly marked, use that
feature to define the boundary. Examples of clear demarcation are a fence line,
plowed field edge, sharp ridgeline, defined stem line, and water's edge along a
stream course, ditch, or canal.
2.
When a boundary between forest land and nonforest land is not clearly marked by an
obvious feature, the boundary should follow the nonforest side of the stems of the
trees at the forest edge.
3.
When a boundary between two contrasting forest land condition classes is not clearly
marked, map along the stems of the contrasting condition. When the boundary
between two contrasting forest land condition classes is separated by a narrow linear
inclusion (creek, fire line, narrow meadow, unimproved road), establish the boundary
at the far edge, relative to subplot center, of the inclusion.
4.
When a plot is remeasured, the crew will examine the boundaries referenced at last
inventory. If no change has occurred, the current crew will retain the boundary data
that were recorded at last inventory. If a boundary has changed, or a new boundary
88
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
is present, or the previous crew made an obvious error, record new or updated
boundary data. Delete boundaries that are no longer distinct.
5.
Although individual MQOs are specified for the azimuths and distances, in practice a
crew will be considered ‘correct’ when the difference in areas as mapped by the
original crew and by the QA crew is less than 10 percent of the subplot or microplot
area. This allows for slight variations in azimuths or distances due to the
approximate nature of mapping procedures.
BOUNDARY DATA
Record the appropriate value for each of the following data items for each boundary mapped on
the subplot or microplot.
If no boundaries are recorded for a subplot, enter one record with PLOT TYPE = 0.
Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER
Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.
This code will be pre-determined from the Plot Menu of the allegro program by selecting
“chOOse subplot” and entering the appropriate subplot number (values shown in the table
below). When in the “Subplot Mapping” screen the subplot number will be shown in the
upper right end of the top row. Make sure that this is the correct subplot before entering data.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code
1
2
3
4
Subplot number
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
Item 2--PLOT TYPE (P)
Record the code to specify whether the boundary data are for a subplot or microplot.If no
boundaries are recorded for a subplot, enter one record with PLOT TYPE = 0.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Plot Type
0
No boundaries are recorded for the subplot
1
Subplot boundary
2
Microplot boundary
89
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Item 3--AK BOUNDARY CHANGE (B)
Remeasurement (SAMPLE KIND = 2) locations only. Record the appropriate code to
indicate the relationship between previously recorded and current boundary information.
When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code Description
No change - boundary is the same as indicated on plot map and/or
0
data collected by a previous crew.
New boundary, or boundary data has been changed to reflect an
1
actual on-the-ground physical change resulting in a difference from
the boundaries recorded.
2
Boundary has been changed to correct an error from previous crew.
3
Boundary has been changed to reflect a change in variable definition.
Item 4--CONTRASTING CONDITION (C)
Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER of the condition class that contrasts with the
condition class located at the subplot center (for boundaries on the subplot) or at the
microplot center (for boundaries on the microplot), e.g., the condition class present on the
other side of the boundary line.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
Item 5--LEFT AZIMUTH (LAzm)
Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to the farthest left point
(facing the contrasting condition class) where the boundary intersects the subplot or
microplot circumference.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 360
Item 6--RIGHT AZIMUTH (RAzm)
Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to the farthest right
point (facing the contrasting condition class) where the boundary intersects the subplot or
microplot plot circumference.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
90
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Tolerance: +/- 10- degrees
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 360
Item 7--CORNER AZIMUTH (CAzm)
Record, in degrees, the azimuth from the subplot or microplot center to a corner or curve in a
boundary. If a boundary is best described by a straight line between two circumference
points, then record 000 for CORNER AZIMUTH.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 000 to 360 (000=None)
Item 8--CORNER DISTANCE (Cdist)
Record the horizontal distance, to the nearest 1 foot, from the subplot or microplot center to
a boundary corner point.
When collected: All boundaries when CORNER AZIMUTH > 000
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 ft
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values:
Plot Type Values for Corner Distance
Microplot 01 to 07 ft (actual limiting distance is 6.8 ft.)
Subplot 01 to 24 ft.
Boundary mapping examples
How to measure a straight boundary on a microplot or subplot.
91
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
How to measure a boundary with a corner on a microplot or subplot.
Item 9--AK boundary notes
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Boundary
being defined.
Accessible by pushing the F4 key, can enter a note for each individual boundary record
(line).
When collected: As needed
Field width: 40
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentances
- SEEDLING DATA Accessible by selecting Subpl info in the Plot Menu.
Stocking, regeneration, and biomass information are obtained by counting live seedlings within
the 6.8-foot radius microplot located 90 degrees and 12.0 feet from each subplot center within
each of the four subplots. The base of the seedling (center of bole) must be at or within the 6.8
foot radius in order to qualify for counting. Conifer seedlings must be at least 0.5 foot in length
and less than 1.0 inch at DBH in order to qualify for tallying. Hardwood seedlings must be at
least 1.0 foot in length and less than 1.0 inch at DBH in order to qualify for tallying. Seedlings
are counted singly or in groups by species, condition class, and length class. Only count
seedlings occurring in accessible forest land condition classes.
Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER
Note: Subplot number will be shown in the upper right corner of the SEEDLING DATA
screen (and will not be editable in the screen). This number will have been determined by
selecting the appropriate subplot in the “chOOse subplot” screen (available in the Plot
Menu).
92
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
When Collected: All counts of seedlings
Field width: 1
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 100 % of the time
Values: 1-4
Item 2--SPECIES
Record the appropriate species code from the list provided below. If you encounter a species
not listed and are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree seedling, consult with your Field
Supervisor. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the seedling, but bring
branch samples, foliage, flowers, bark, etc. to your supervisor for identification. If possible
collect samples outside the subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the
SPECIES code later.
When Collected: All counts of seedlings
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors for genus, no errors for species
MQO: At least 90% of the time for genus, at least 85% of the time for species
Values:
CODE
011
019
042
094
095
098
108
231
SPECIES
Pacific silver fir
subalpine fir
Alaska yellow-cedar
white spruce
black spruce
sitka spruce
lodegepole pine
Pacific yew
CODE
242
263
264
351
375
746
747
SPECIES
western redcedar
western hemlock
mountain hemlock
red alder
paper birch
quaking aspen
black cottonwood
Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER
Assign the appropriate CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (as defined in the CONDITION
CLASS chapter) to the seedling or group of seedlings that are rooted in the respective
condition. Remember, seedling counts are not to be performed in non-forest conditions.
When Collected: All counts of seedlings
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1-9
General Seedling Count Rules:
• Multiple “suckers” that originate from the same location, and stump sprouts are
considered one seedling.
• Do not tally any seedlings that sprout from a live tally tree.
• Measure seedling length not “height”, if a seedling is twisted or leaning measure along
the main stem from ground level to the dominant apical leader.
• Do not tally or count “layers” (undetached tree branches partially or completely covered
by soil and/or organic materials, usually at the base) as seedlings.
93
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Item 4--AK seedling count, length class 1
Record the total number of conifer seedlings that fall into the length range:
≥ 0.5 foot and < 1.0 foot
If there are no conifer seedlings for this length class then record 000
When collected: When SPECIES = 010 - 299
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: ± 5
MQO: 90% of the time
Values: 000-999
Item 5--AK seedling count, length class 2
Record the total number of conifer or hardwood seedlings that fall into the length range:
≥ 1.0 foot and < 2.5 feet
If there are no conifer or hardwood seedlings for this length class then record 000
When collected: When SPECIES = 010 - 999
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: ± 5
MQO: 90% of the time
Values: 000 - 999
Item 6--AK seedling count, length class 3
Record the total number of conifer or hardwood seedlings that fall into the length range:
≥ 2.5 feet and < 4.5 feet.
If there are no conifer or hardwood seedlings for this length class then record 000
When collected: When SPECIES = 010 - 999
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: ± 2
MQO: 90% of the time
Values: 000 - 999
Item 7--AK seedling count, length class 4
Record the total number of conifer or hardwood seedlings that fall into the length range:
≥ 4.5 feet
If there are no conifer or hardwood seedlings for this length class then record 000
When collected: When SPECIES = 010 - 999
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: ± 2
MQO: 90% of the time
Values: 000 - 999
Item 8--AK seedling notes
Record any notes needed to clarify or explain a special situation in the particular Seedling
record being defined. Accessible by pushing the F4 key,
94
Annual Inventory 2005
VII. SUBPLOT INFORMATION
When collected: As needed
Field width: 40
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentances
NOTES:
95
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Table of Contents
A. Introduction……………………………………………………………………..97
B. Determining if a tree/sapling/seedling
is selected on a fixed-radius plot
C. Tree and sapling data
D. Notes on Tree Record Data Entry
(Field Data Recorder)
Item 5--AK PRESENT TREE STATUS…………………………………………101
Item 17--DIAMETER (DBH)……………………………………………………..108
Item 19--AK 10-YR INCREMENT……………………………………………….114
Item 23--COMPACTED CROWN RATIO………………………………………116
Item 28--AK MORTALITY YEAR………………………………………………..121
96
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
A. Introduction
Trees and snags (> 5.0 in. d.b.h.) are sampled using the 1/24 acre fixed-radius subplot. Each
subplot has a fixed-radius of 24.0 feet horizontal. HORIZONTAL DISTANCE and AZIMUTH for
trees and snags (≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.) are measured from the appropriate subplot center.
Saplings (1.0 in. to 4.9 in. d.b.h.) are sampled more efficiently using the small fixed-radius
microplot. Each microplot has a fixed-radius of 6.8 feet horizontal. Saplings must be live at time
of measurement. DISTANCE and AZIMUTH for live saplings are measured from microplot
center.
B. Determining if a tree/sapling/seedling is selected on a fixed-radius plot
Trees/saplings/seedlings are selected for measurement only when the distance from their bole
center (a.k.a. pith) at the ground, to the subplot center is less than the radius of that
subplot/microplot plot (see figure below).
Note: The method for determining whether a tree/sapling was selected for mesaurement in the
previous (periodic) Alaska inventory was different than current annual procedures. Previously a
tree/sapling was selected for measurement if the bole center of the tree at dbh was at or within
the fixed plot radius. Note that in this inventory, the tree/sapling will be selected if the bole
center at the ground is within the fixed plot radius. There is no difference in method between
both types of inventory for Seedling selection on the fixed plot radius
Trees at least 5.0 inches in diameter are sampled within the 24.0 foot subplot. ‘Tally trees’
are defined as all live and standing dead trees in accessible forest land condition classes
encountered on the subplot the first time a subplot is established, and all trees that grow into
a subplot thereafter. These data yield information on tree volume, growth, mortality, and
removals; wildlife habitats; forest structure and composition; biomass; and carbon
sequestration.
Trees with a diameter at least 1.0 inch but less than 5.0 inches, termed saplings, are
sampled within the microplot. ‘Tally saplings’ are defined as all live saplings in accessible
forest land condition classes encountered the first time a microplot is established, and all
saplings that grow into each microplot thereafter are included until they grow to 5.0 inches or
97
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
larger, at which time they are tallied on the 24.0 foot subplot and referenced (new AZIMUTH
and HORIZONTAL DISTANCE taken) to the subplot center.
Trees are alive if they have any living parts (leaves, buds, cambium) at or above the point of
diameter measurement (DBH). Trees that have been temporarily defoliated are still alive.
Once tallied, dead trees over 5.0 inches in diameter are tracked until they no longer qualify
as standing dead. Working around dead trees is a safety hazard - crews should
exercise extreme caution! Trees that are deemed unsafe to measure should be
estimated.
To qualify as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be at least 5.0 inches in diameter,
have a bole which has an unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less
than 45 degrees from vertical.
“Unbroken” is defined as at least 50 percent attached to the original source of growth. The
degree of lean on dead trees with partially separated (i.e., 1 to 50 percent) boles is
measured from the base of the tree to the top of ACTUAL LENGTH.
Portions of boles on dead trees that are separated greater than 50 percent (either above or
below 4.5 feet), are considered severed and are included in Down Woody Materials (DWM)
if they otherwise meet DWM tally criteria.
Live and dead standing tally trees, and partially separated boles of dead tally trees, do not
have to be self-supported. They may be supported by other trees, branches, or their crown.
Trees that have been cut above DBH qualify as tally trees, provided they meet the size
(DBH) requirement.
The following apply at remeasurement:
ƒ
If at the previous visit a forked tree was recorded as two separate trees but should
have been recorded as one tree, delete one tree and correct the diameter for the
remaining tree. Record an explanation in TREE NOTES.
ƒ
If at the previous visit a forked tree was recorded as one tree but should have been
recorded as two separate trees, correct the diameter for the remeasured tree to
represent one tree, and add the other fork as a new tree. Record an explanation in
TREE NOTES.
Begin tallying trees at an azimuth of 001 degrees from subplot center and continue
clockwise around the subplot. Repeat this sequence for trees on the microplot.
C. Tree and sapling data
Follow the steps below:
1.) If the condition class is accessible forest land (CONDITION CLASS STATUS = 1) follow
these steps for trees/saplings in the condition class:
98
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
a) Tally all trees live and ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h. that are within the 24.0 ft. subplot.
Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1.
b) Tally all trees standing dead, ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h., ≥ 4.5 feet tall, leaning < 45 degrees from
vertical, that are within the 24.0 ft. subplot.
Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2.
c) Tally all live trees 1.0 to 4.9 in. d.b.h. that are within the 6.8 ft. microplot.
Assign a PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1.
2.) If the condition class is NOT accessible forest land (Nonforest, Nonsampled,
Census/Noncensus Water):
Do not tally live trees, saplings, dead trees (snags), or seedlings
D. Notes on Tree Record Data Entry (Field Data Recorder)
Record one line on the data recorder for each tree sampled. Required data items for these
trees vary by subplot, condition class and tree status. Use this section to determine which items
to complete for a particular kind of tree.
For each condition class where there are no tree records for the condition class other than
TREE STATUS of 2 (snag), or 9 (witness-only) within the 24.0 feet of subplot center, record one
line with the subplot number, the condition class number, a PRESENT TREE STATUS of "N"
and enter "NO TALLY" in tree notes. If all forest condition classes within subplot 1 are "NO
TALLY", two additional records are required to witness subplot center. These witness records
can represent sound stumps or snags, but live trees are preferable
If both a forest and nonforest condition class is mapped on a subplot's 24.0-foot fixed-radius
plot, enter one line for each nonforest condition class; for each of these records, enter the
subplot number, condition class number, and a PRESENT TREE STATUS of N, and enter "NO
TALLY" in tree notes.
Item 1--SUBPLOT NUMBER
Record the subplot number where the tree occurs.
Note: Subplot number will be shown in the lower left corner of the TREE & SAPLING DATA
screen (and will not be editable in the screen). This number will have been determined by
selecting the appropriate subplot in the chOOse subplot screen in the Plot Menu.
When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h., witness only trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
1 Center subplot
2 North subplot
3 Southeast subplot
4 Southwest subplot
99
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Item 2--TREE RECORD NUMBER (Trn)
Record a code to uniquely and permanently identify each tree on a given subplot. The
TREE RECORD NUMBERS must be unique within a subplot – being unique is more
important than being sequential. In general, work clockwise from azimuth 001 to 360, and
work outwards from subplot center to subplot perimeter. On remeasured plots, use the
previously assigned tree number. Saplings tallied on microplots will retain their initially
assigned tree number if they grow to tree size. Missed trees will be assigned the next
available tree number. DO NOT renumber all plot trees in order to assign a more “correct”
tree number to a missed tree. Numbers assigned to trees that are subsequently found to be
extra will be dropped and not reused.
All tree record numbers will be “written” on the matching tree with a orange (or other bright
color) paint sticks/crayons, try to place the number facing plot center.
If the plot is in National Forest Wilderness, paintsticks are not to be used on any tree in
any way.
For SAMPLE KIND = 1 plots the TREE RECORD NUMBER will start at 001 with the first tree
and continue in sequence. If after entering several trees you find that a tree was missed, go
ahead and add it even though the tree record number will not match the sequence based on
Azimuth.
On remeasured plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2) the tree record numbers will be downloaded
from the previous visit. If there is a gap in the numbering sequence on the downloaded trees
(i.e. jumps from 1 to 5) do not use the missing numbers for new trees. Any additional trees
during the current visit will be given the next number (in sequence) after the highest
downloaded tree record number. Be sure to account for all trees (using proper RECONCILE
codes if needed) that were recorded during the previous sample.
When collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in dbh and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in,
witness only trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of time
Values: 001 to 999
Item 3--CONDITION CLASS NUMBER (C)
Record the CONDITION CLASS NUMBER in which each tree is located. Often, a referenced
boundary is approximate, and trees selected for tally are assigned to the actual condition in
which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary
See Example Next Page
100
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Ragged CONDITION CLASS boundary and tree condition class designation.
When Collected: All trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
Item 4--AK PREVIOUS TREE STATUS (p)
If not downloaded from the previous inventory, record PREVIOUS TREE STATUS for each
remeasured tally tree. This code is used to track the status of sample trees over time. This
information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the proper component of
volume change.
When Collected: On remeasurement plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2), downloaded for all
previously tallied trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance; No errors
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Values:
1 Live Tree alive at previous inventory
2 Dead Tree standing dead tree at the previous inventory
Item 5--AK PRESENT TREE STATUS (S)
Record a current PRESENT TREE STATUS for each tallied tree; this code is used to track
the status of sample trees over time: as they first appear, as ingrowth, as they survive, and
when they die or are removed. This information is needed to correctly assign volume
information to the proper component of volume change.
101
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
When collected: All new live tally trees > 1.0 inches d.b.h.,
All new dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h.
witness only trees
On remeasurement plots, all previously tallied trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of time
Values:
Code TREE
STATUS
0
1
2
3
8
9
N
Description
Remeasurement plots only. Tree is not presently in the
sample. Tree was incorrectly tallied at the previous inventory
No Status
or currently is not tallied due to definition or procedural change,
or is not tallied due to natural causes. Requires RECONCILE
code=5-8
Live Tree
Live tree (new, remeasured or ingrowth)
Any dead tree (new, remeasured or ingrowth) regardless of
cause of death Includes all previously standing dead trees that
no longer qualify as standing dead, as well as trees killed by
Dead Tree
sivicultural or land clearing activity, and are assumed not to
have been utilized.. Stumps meeting size and lean criteria are
tallied as dead trees.
Remeasurement plots only. Tree that has been cut or
removed by direct human activity related to harvesting,
Removed
silvicultural activity or land clearing. The tree is assumed to
have been utilized.
Witness Non- A non-tally live or dead tree that is to be used for a subplot
Tally Tree
witness.
A witness that is not a tree. It may be a shrub, rock, or other;
Witness-Other
notes are required to describe the witness.
Used for each condition class without live tally trees (TREE
No Live Tally
STATUS 1)
NOTE: Certain tree re-measurement situations involving PRESENT TREE STATUS,
STANDING DEAD, and RECONCILE need to be clarified and understood by all field going
personnel:
-When a dead tree falls down, or otherwise does not qualify as a tree to be measured (see
STANDING DEAD tree requirements page 103), regardless of PREVIOUS TREE STATUS,
code the tree as follows: PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 (dead), STANDING DEAD = 0 (no longer
qualifies as Standing Dead), RECONCILE and any other variables are not required (notes will be
available if needed).
- For live subplot trees that shrink to become live saplings on the microplot, crews must collect
new AZIMUTH and HORIZONTAL DISTANCE information from the microplot center.
102
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Item 6--AK subplot tally tree witness flag
Use this flag to mark the current tally tree (live or dead) as a witness. To activate the flag press
the “w” key (this should display a w next to PRESENT TREE STATUS). To turn the witness flag
off (when you do not want the current record as a witness) then hit the “w” key again.
When collected: When PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 or 2, and the tally tree is chosen by
the crew to be a subplot witness
Field width: 1
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Values:
Code
Description
no mark
current record is not a tally tree witness
w
current record is a tally tree witness
Item 7--AK STANDING DEAD
Record the code that describes whether the tree qualifies as standing dead or not. To qualify
as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be at least 5.0 inches in diameter, have a bole
which has an unbroken ACTUAL LENGTH of at least 4.5 feet, and lean less than 45 degrees
from vertical.
“Unbroken” is defined as at least 50 percent attached to the original source of growth. The
degree of lean on dead trees with partially separated (i.e., 1 to 50 percent) boles is
measured from the base of the tree to the top of ACTUAL LENGTH.
Portions of boles on dead trees that are separated greater than 50 percent (either above or
below 4.5 feet), are considered severed and are included in Down Woody Materials (DWM) if
they otherwise meet DWM tally criteria.
Live and dead standing tally trees, and partially separated boles of dead tally trees, do not
have to be self-supported. They may be supported by other trees, branches, or their crown.
When collected: All dead tally trees (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
0
1
No - tree does not qualify as standing dead
Yes - tree does qualify as standing dead
103
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Item 8--AK RECONCILE (I)
For remeasurement locations only, record a RECONCILE code for any new tally tree that
was not tallied in the previous inventory, and for all no status remeasurement trees
(PRESENT TREE STATUS=0). This code is used to identify the reason a new tree
appeared in the inventory, and identify the reason a remeasurement tree no longer qualifies
as a tally tree. This information is needed to correctly assign volume information to the
proper component of volume change.
When Collected: On SAMPLE KIND=2; all new live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH (PRESENT
TREE STATUS = 1 and no PREVIOUS TREE STATUS), all new dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in
(PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and no PREVIOUS TREE STATUS), all no status trees
(PRESENT TREE STATUS=0)
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Values:
104
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Codes 1-4 are valid for new trees on the plot:
1 Ingrowth – new tally tree not qualifying as through growth (includes reversions).
2 Through growth – new tally tree 5 inches DBH and larger, within the microplot.
3 Missed live – a live tree missed at previous inventory and that is live, dead or
removed now.
4 Missed dead – a dead tree missed at previous inventory and that is dead or
removed now.
9 Procedural change – A tree not tallied at the previous inventory, but is now
included in the tree tally due to a definition or procedural change.
Codes 5-8 are valid for remeasured trees that no longer qualify as tally:
5 Shrank – live tree that shrank below threshold diameter on microplot/subplot
6 Missing – tree was tallied in previous inventory, but is now missing due to natural
causes such as landslide, fire, etc.
7 Cruiser error – erroneously tallied at previous inventory
8 Procedural change – tree was tallied at the previous inventory, but is no longer
tallied due to a definition or procedural change
Code 5 is used to indicate live trees that shrink below the diameter threshold on the
microplot/subplot. For example, if a live remeasurement tree shrinks below the 5.0 inch DBH
on the subplot, then record the following combination of codes: PREVIOUS TREE STATUS
= 1, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 0, RECONCILE = 5. If a live measured tree shrinks below
the 5.0 inch threshold on the subplot and is currently greater than or equal to 1.0 inch on the
microplot, then record PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1.
Record all required items for a tally sapling.
Item 9--AK previous species (sPc)
When visiting previously installed plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2), all of the previous species calls
in the tree record will be downloaded into the current SPECIES field. The previous code will
aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any errors made in the previous visit. If there is
an obvious error in the species call, then feel free to correct it with the values given under
SPECIES below. If the downloaded species appears to be correct then move on to the next
Item (previous azimuth in the AZIMUTH field).
When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and
needs to be checked for obvious errors
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time for genus, at least 95% of the time for species
Values: See SPECIES code table below
Item 10--SPECIES (sPc)
Record the appropriate SPECIES code from the list provided. If you encounter a species not
listed and are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree, consult your Crew Leader/Unit
Coordinator. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the tree, but bring branch
samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to your supervisor for identification. If possible,
collect samples outside the subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the
105
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
SPECIES code later. Use code 0299 for unknown dead conifer and 0998 for unknown dead
hardwood when the genus or species codes cannot be used. The generic code should only
be used when you are sure the species is on the species list, but you cannot differentiate
among acceptable species. This is often the case with standing dead trees on newly
established plots. In this case use the sample collections procedures described earlier in
this paragraph.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.
all witnesses unless AK subplot witness flag = +
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time for genus, at least 95% of the time for species
Values:
CODE SPECIES
CODE SPECIES
011
Pacific silver fir
242
western redcedar
019
subalpine fir
263
western hemlock
042
Alaska yellow-cedar
264
mountain hemlock
094
white spruce
351
red alder
095
black spruce
375
paper birch
098
sitka spruce
746
quaking aspen
108
lodegepole pine
747
black cottonwood
231
Pacific yew
Item 11--AK previous azimuth (aZm)
When visiting previously installed plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2), all of the previous azimuth calls
in the tree record will be downloaded into the current AZIMUTH field. The previous code will
aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any errors made in the previous visit. If there is
an obvious error in the azimuth call, then feel free to correct it with the values given under
AZIMUTH below. If the downloaded azimuth appears to be correct then move on to the next
Item (previous distance in the HORIZONTAL DISTANCE field).
When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and
needs to be checked for obvious errors
Field width 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 360
NOTE: In the previous inventory, azimuth was measured to the center of bole at dbh. This
inventory measures azimuth to the center of bole at the base (ground) of the tree. Make sure
that previous azimuths match current methods for all new and remeasured trees/saplings.
Item 12--AZIMUTH (aZm)
Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center (for trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h.) or the microplot
center (trees ≥1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches d.b.h.), sight the center of the base of each tree with
a compass. Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north.
Note: For microplot trees (saplings) which become trees (at the time of plot remeasurement),
crews must collect new azimuth and distance information from the subplot center.
106
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in
d.b.h., all witnesses
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
MQO: At least 90% of time
Values: 001 to 360
DISTANCE and AZIMUTH to Pistol Butt Trees
When dealing with pistol butt trees it is important to measure the distance and azimuth to a
consistent point on the bole. Therefore, all distances and azimuths are to be measured to the
pith of the bole, where any part of the bole first enters the ground (see figures below as a guide).
Another way of visualizing this method is to imagine taking the diameter tape, while loosely
wrapped around the bole, and let it slide down the bole until the tape hits the ground, measure
to the pith at this point. If the pistol butt bole is on a slope, do not arbitrarily measure to where
the uphill side of the bole enters the ground. In a krummholz situation, be sure to follow the bole
(from the foliated crown) until any part of it first enters the ground, ignore any other multiple bole
departure - penetration into the ground.
Pistol butt on sloped ground
Krummholz situation
Pistol butt on flat ground
Item 13--AK previous horizontal distance (Hdis)
When visiting previously installed plots (SAMPLE KIND = 2), all of the previous horizontal
distance calls in the tree record will be downloaded into the current HORIZONTAL
DISTANCE field. The previous code will aid in tree reconciliation and will help correct any
errors made in the previous visit. If there is an obvious error in the horizontal distance call,
then feel free to correct it with the values given under HORIZONTAL DISTANCE below. If
the downloaded horizontal distance appears to be correct then move on to the next Item.
NOTE: Previous (periodic) methods for Horizontal Distance required the center of the tree
bole at dbh be at or within the fixed plot radius. Current methods require the measurement at
the center of the tree bole at the base (ground). Be aware that old distances may be “off”,
requiring accurate measurements using the new methodology.
When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 2, All trees, previous visit call will be downloaded and
needs to be checked for obvious errors
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
Tolerance:
Microplot: +/- 0.2 ft
Subplot: +/- 1.0 ft
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 06.8
Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0
107
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Item 14--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdis)
Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 foot, from the subplot
center (for trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h.) or microplot center (for trees ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches
d.b.h.) to the pith of the tree at the base.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
Tolerance: Microplot: +/- 0.2 ft
Subplot: +/- 1.0 ft
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 06.8
Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0
Item 15--AK slope distance to witness (sdi)
Record the slope distance, to the nearest 0.1 foot, from where the subplot center pin enters
the ground, to the head of the nail that affixes the aluminum round/tag at the base of the
witness tree (or, to the face of the object selected as a witness-explain in tree notes).
When collected: All witnesses
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
Tolerance: +/- 0.2 feet
MQO: At least 90 % of the time
Values: 00.1 to 99.9
Item 16--AK previous diameter at breast height (pdia)
This is the DBH assigned by the field crew during the previous visit (converted from metric to
english). It has been downloaded from the previous inventory and will not be editable by the
current field crew. This variable is provided to aid in tree reconciliation and to account for any
possible errors made in the previous visit.
When collected: When SAMPLE KIND = 2, All downloaded live tally trees/saplings ≥ 1.0
inch d.b.h., all downloaded standing dead tally trees
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: 001.0 to 999.9
Item 17--DIAMETER (Diam)
Diameters are measured at breast height (4.5 feet above ground line on the uphill side of the
tree). Trees with diameters ≥ 1.0 inch and < 5.0 inches are measured on the 6.8 foot radius
microplot, those with diameters of ≥ 5.0 inches are measured on the 24 foot radius subplots.
Diameters are used in calculating volume, growth, average stand diameter, and stocking-related
estimates such as forest type and stand size
108
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
NOTE: when measuring diameter with the dbh tape, if the measurement falls between two
1/10th inch marks on the tape, always record to the smallest (lowest) mark…don’t round up!!
Marking Current Diameter:
1. Marking d.b.h. on trees previously marked:
The place where diameter was measured at the previous visit on trees tallied live and ≥
3.0 in. d.b.h. was marked with an aluminum nail. On these trees, remeasure diameter at
the location of the previous crew’s nail if appropriate using the rules below (under
DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT). Reset the old nail enough so that as much of the old
nail is exposed as possible. If the old nail cannot be pulled out to meet this requirement,
set a new nail at the same location. If the previous location is no longer accessible (ie.
covered in a landslide), there is an abnormality at the previous DIAMETER measurement
point, or it is more than 12 inches away from where the diameter should be measured
according to current protocols (either because protocols have changed or the previous
crew made a mistake) move the point of measurement and assign a DIAMETER CHECK
code of 2. If the old nail marks a point of diameter measurement not used at the current
inventory, remove it if possible; otherwise pound it in flush with the tree. NOTE: If the
previous nail falls within the range of tolerance outlined above, do not pull it out of the
tree just because it is not facing the subplot center. Keep original placement of nails at all
times unless there is obvious error (see tolerances above), place a new nail at the old if it
cannot be pulled out and is in danger of being completely swallowed before the next revisit (10 yrs).
2. Marking trees ≥ 3.0 in. d.b.h., or snags ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h., tallied for the first time:
Set an aluminum nail at the point of diameter measurement. On level ground, place the
nail on the side of the tree facing the subplot/microplot center. On a steep slope, place
the nail on the uphill side of the bole. Leave as much of the nail exposed as possible, but
be sure it is firmly affixed to the tree. Use caution to avoid damaging trees with nails (i.e.
hitting bole with axe while hammering). Do not nail trees less than 3.0 inches in
diameter.
When Collected:
All live tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h.,
all standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in d.b.h., when AK subplot witness flag = *
(asterisk), when PRESENT TREE STATUS = 9
Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y)
Tolerance: Live trees, and dead trees with Decay Class 1, 2: +/- 0.1 in. per 20.0 in increment of
measured diameter. A tree with a diameter of 41.0 in would have a tolerance of +/0.3 in.
Dead trees with Decay Class 3, 4, 5: +/- 1.0 in. per 20.0 in increment of measured
diameter.
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Values: 001.0 to 999.9
109
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (DBH)
Unless one of the following special situations is encountered, measure DBH at 4.5 ft above
the ground line on the uphill side of the tree. Round each measurement down to the last 0.1
inch. For example, a reading of 3.68 inches is recorded as 3.6 inches.
Special DBH situations:
1. Forked tree: In order to qualify as a fork, the stem in question must be at least 1/3 the
diameter of the main stem and must branch out from the main stem at an angle of 45
degrees or less. Forks originate at the point on the bole where the piths intersect. Forked
trees are handled differently depending on whether the fork originates below 1.0 foot,
between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, or above 4.5 feet.
•
Trees forked below 1.0 foot. Trees forked in this region
are treated as distinctly separate trees. Distances and
azimuths are measured individually to the center of
each stem where it splits from the stump. DBH is
measured for each stem at 4.5 feet above the ground.
When stems originate from pith intersections below 1
foot, it is possible for some stems to be within the
limiting distance of the microplot or subplot, and others
to be beyond the limiting distance. If stems originating
from forks that occur below 1.0 foot fork again between 1.0 and 4.5 feet, the rules in the
next paragraph apply.
•
Trees forked between 1.0 foot and 4.5 feet. Trees
forked in this region are also counted as separate
trees, but only one distance and azimuth (to the
central stump) is used for all. Although a single
azimuth and distance applies to all, multiple stems
should be recorded as they occur in clockwise order
(from front to back when one stem is directly in front
of another). The DBH of each fork is measured at a
point 3.5 feet above the pith intersection. When
forks originate from pith intersections between 1.0
and 4.5 feet, the limiting distance is the same for all
forks--they are either all on, or all off the plot.
Multiple forks are possible if they all originate from approximately the same point on the main
stem. In such cases, measure DBH on all stems at 3.5 feet above the common pith
intersection.
Once a stem is tallied as a fork that originated from a pith intersection between 1.0 and 4.5
feet, do not recognize any additional forks that may occur on that stem. Measure the
110
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
diameter of such stems below the base of stem separation (i.e., do not move the point of
diameter the entire 3.5 feet above the first fork).
• Trees forked at or above 4.5 feet. Trees forked in
this region count as one single tree. If a fork
occurs at or immediately above 4.5 feet, measure
diameter below the fork just beneath any swelling
that would inflate DBH.
Diamter
Point
Pith
intersection
4.5’
2. Stump Sprouts. Stump sprouts originate between ground level and 4.5 feet on the boles
of trees that have died or been cut. Stump sprouts are handled the same as forked trees,
with the exception that stump sprouts are not required to be 1/3 the diameter of the dead
bole. Stump sprouts originating below 1.0 foot are measured at 4.5 feet from ground line.
Stump sprouts originating between 1.0 foot and 4.5 feet are measured at 3.5 foot above their
point of occurrence. As with forks, rules for measuring distance and azimuth depend on
whether the sprouts originate above or below 1.0 foot.
3. Tree with butt-swell or bottleneck: Measure these trees 1.5 feet above the end of the
swell or bottleneck if the swell or bottleneck extends 3.0 feet or more above the ground.
Diameter
point
1.5’
3.0’ or
more
4. Tree with irregularities at DBH: On trees with swellings, bumps, depressions, and
branches at DBH, diameter will be measured immediately above the irregularity at the place
it ceases to affect normal stem form.
Diameter
point
Diameter
point
4.5’
4.5’
111
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
5. Tree on slope: Measure diameter at 4.5 feet from the ground along the bole on the uphill
side of the tree.
4.5’
6. Leaning tree: Measure diameter at 4.5 feet from the ground along the bole. The 4.5 foot
distance is measured along the underside face of the bole.
4.5’
7. Turpentine tree: On trees with turpentine face extending above 4.5 feet, estimate the
diameter at 10.0 feet above the ground and multiply by 1.1 to estimate DBH outside bark.
8. Independent trees that grow together: If two or more independent stems have grown
together at or above the point of DBH, continue to treat them as separate trees. Estimate the
diameter of each, set the “DIAMETER CHECK” code to 1, and explain the situation in the
notes.
9. Missing wood or bark. Do not reconstruct the DBH of a tree that is missing wood or bark
or at the point of measurement. Record the diameter, to the nearest 0.1 inch, of the wood
and bark that is still attached to the tree. If a tree has a localized abnormality (gouge,
depression, etc.) at the point of point of DBH, apply the procedure described for trees with
irregularities at DBH.
10. Live windthrown tree: Measure from the top of the root collar along the length to 4.5 feet.
Root
Collar
4.5’
112
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
11. Down live tree with tree-form branches growing vertical from main bole. When a down
live tree, touching the ground, has vertical (less than 45 degrees from vertical) tree-like
branches coming off the main bole, first determine whether or not the pith of the main bole
(averaged along the first log of the tree) is above or below the duff layer.
Duff consists of decomposing leaves and other organic material. You should see no
recognizable plant parts, the duff layer is usually dark decomposed organic matter. When
moss is present, the top of the duff layer is just below the green portion of the moss. The
bottom of this layer is the point where mineral soil (A horizon) begins.
• If the pith of the main bole is above the duff layer, use the same forking rules specified for
a forked tree, and take all measurements accordingly (figure below).
• If the pith intersection of the main down bole and vertical tree-like branch occurs below
4.5feet from the stump along the main bole, treat that branch as a separate tree, and
measure DBH 3.5 ‘ above the pith intersection for both the main bole and the tree-like
branch (figure below).
Down tree above duff
• If the intersection between the main down bole and the tree-like branch occurs beyond
the 4.5foot point from the stump along the main bole, treat that branch as part of the main
down bole (figure above).
• If the pith of main tree bole is below the duff layer, ignore the main bole, and treat each
tree-like branch as a separate tree; take DBH and length measurements from the ground,
not necessarily from the top of the down bole (figure below). However, if the top of the
main tree bole curves out of the ground towards a vertical angle, treat that portion of that
top as an individual tree originating where the pith leaves the duff layer.
113
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Down tree below duff
12. Tree with curved bole (pistol butt tree): Measure along the bole on the uphill side
(upper surface) of the tree.
13. Diameter on stump (for witness): Use a logger's tape, cloth tape or ruler to measure the
longest and shortest axis across the top of the stump. Record diameter as the average of
the two measurements.
Item 18--AK DIAMETER CHECK (c)
Record this code to identify any irregularities in diameter measurement positions (i.e.
abnormal swellings, diseases, damage, new measurement positions, etc.) that may affect
use of this tree in diameter growth/change analyses.
If diameter at the current inventory is measured at a different location than at the previous
inventory (due to one of the reasons shown under Item 16--DIAMETER above), record
DIAMETER CHECK=2 and remove the d-nail(s) from the previous inventory.
NOTE: If the previous point of diameter measurement cannot be found on a live tree (ie. nail
fell out) also record code 2. If diameter is BOTH estimated and moved, also use code 2.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in d.b.h. and standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in d.b.h.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of time
Values:
Code Diameter check
0
Diameter measured accurately
1
Diameter estimated
Diameter measured at different location than previous
2
measurement (remove original d-nail)
Item 19--AK 10-YR INCREMENT (Inc)
A 3-digit code recording bored radial increment inside the bark to the nearest 1/20th inch for
a 10-year period. 10-YR INC is recorded for the first live growing stock tree in each 2-inch
dbh class (ex. 6-inch class = 5.0” – 6.9”) and species combination on new plots and for all
new trees on remeasurement plots. To see a chart tracking trees still needed by size class
do the following: push ctrl + Z, in the Utility menu select the “Tree DBH/Species Report”.
To obtain radial increment:
•
Bore the tree just below the point of diameter measurement (to avoid impacting the
diameter measurement) on the same side of the tree facing the point. If tree is on a
steep slope, bore for age on the uphill side.
114
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
•
•
Count back 10 growth rings from the cambium end of the core starting from the first
fully-formed ring (and skipping this year’s summer growth)(see figure below).
Measure the length of this segment of the core to the nearest 1/20th of an inch to get
radial increment. Enter this radial increment as the number of twentieths. E.g. 18/20
is recorded as “18” and 27/20 is recorded “27”.
The cambium is often pinkish in color with a squishy, moist, corklike texture.
The current year’s unfinished growth is usually very light colored.
When collected: Live tally trees ≥ 5 inches dbh, on all new plots (SAMPLE KIND = 1 or 3,
PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1); live tally trees ≥ 5 inches dbh, on previously measured
plots, that were missed, or are ingrowth, ongrowth, or through-growth (trees on plots where
SAMPLE KIND = 2, PRESENT TREE STATUS = 1 and RECONCILE = 1, 2, or 3.)
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1/20 per 1 inch of increment
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 1 to 999
Item 20--ACTUAL LENGTH (alE)
For trees with missing tops (top on live trees is completely detached; top on dead trees is
greater than 50 percent detached from the tree). Record the ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree
to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the break. Use the length to the break for
ACTUAL LENGTH until a new leader qualifies as the new top for TOTAL LENGTH; until that
occurs, continue to record ACTUAL LENGTH to the break. Trees with previously broken
tops are considered recovered (i.e., ACTUAL LENGTH = TOTAL LENGTH) when a new
leader is 1/3 the diameter of the broken top at the point where the top was broken (not where
the new leader originates from the trunk). ACTUAL LENGTH is the length of the bole, not the
vertical height and should only differ from TOTAL LENGTH if the tree has a broken or
missing top.
When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 005 to 400
Item 21--AK LENGTH METHOD
Record the code that indicates the method used to determine tree lengths.
115
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h., and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in
d.b.h.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of time
Values:
Data Recorder
Code
B
A
N
Length Method
Actual and total lengths are field measured with a measurement
instrument (e.g., laser, clinometer, relascope, taping complete pieces
that have recently fallen and adding to actual length)
Actual length is measured with an instrument, total length is visually
estimated
Actual and total lengths are visually estimated (not measured).
Item 22--TOTAL LENGTH (tLe)
Record the TOTAL LENGTH of the tree, to the nearest 1.0 ft from ground level to the top of
the tree. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree has
a missing top (top is broken and completely detached from the tree), estimate what the total
length would be if there were no missing top. Dead, crooked, or forked tops do not affect
TOTAL LENGTH.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h. and,
all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 in. d.b.h.
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 005 to 400
Item 23--COMPACTED CROWN RATIO (cR)
Record the COMPACTED CROWN RATIO for each live tally tree, 1.0 in and larger to the
nearest 1 percent. COMPACTED CROWN RATIO is that portion of the tree supporting live
foliage (or in the case of extreme temporary defolialtion, should be supporting live foliage)
and is expressed as a percentage of the ACTUAL TREE LENGTH (ie. include dead tops, but
not missing tops in the ratio). To determine COMPACTED CROWN RATIO, ocularly transfer
lower live branches to fill in large holes in the upper portion of the tree until a full, even crown
is visualized. Try to picture the normal density of photosynthetic foliage and adjust for it (i.e.
some branches may be very sparse with needles/leaves). Do not over-compact trees
beyond their typical full crown situation. For example, if tree branches tend to average 2-feet
between whorls, do not compact crowns any tighter than the 2-foot spacing Include
epicormic branches once they are 1” diameter.
NOTE:Crown ratio is based on the ratio of foliage, not where the limbs attach to the tree
bole. Crown ratio is an indicator of a tree's vigor. In data analysis, trees with a crown ratio of
30 percent or less are considered less vigorous. For this reason, be particularly careful
when deciding between codes greater or less than "30." It is preferable to use a laser or
116
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
clinometer to measure live crown ratios on these trees. See figure below to get an idea of
what is required to get from an uncompacted crown to a COMPACTED CROWN RATIO.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in. d.b.h.
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10% (10% of 100)
MQO: At least 80% of the time
Values: 00 to 99
Compacted Crown Ratio Examples
Item 24--CROWN CLASS (c)
Rate tree crowns in relation to the sunlight received and proximity to neighboring trees.
Base the assessment on the position of the crown at the time of observation. Example: a
formerly overtopped tree which is now dominant due to tree removal is classified as
dominant.
Crown classifications are easily applied in even-aged stands. Classifications are more
difficult to assign in uneven-aged stands or in plots where more than one age class is
present. In these situations, classify the tree based on its immediate environment. In other
words, base your classification on how much light the tree's crown is receiving, not its
position in the canopy. This data item is used to predict tree growth. The intermediate and
overtopped crown classes are meant to include trees seriously affected by direct competition
with adjacent trees.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in d.b.h.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 85% of the time
Values:
117
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Code Crown class
1
Open grown
2
Dominant
3
Codominant
4
Intermediate
5
Overtopped
Definition
Trees with crowns that receive full light from above and from all sides
throughout most of its life, particularly during its early developmental
period.
Trees with crown extending above the general level of the crown
canopy and receiving full light from above and partly from the sides.
These trees are taller than the average trees in the stand and their
crowns are well developed, but they could be somewhat crowded on
the sides.
Also, trees whose crowns have received full light from above and
from all sides during early development and most of their life. Their
crown form or shape appears to be free of influence from neighboring
trees.
Trees with crowns at the general level of the crown canopy. Crowns
receive full light from above but little direct sunlight penetrates their
sides. Usually they have medium-sized crowns and are somewhat
crowded from the sides. In stagnated stands, codominant trees have
small-sized crowns and are crowded on the sides.
These trees are shorter than dominants and codominants, but their
crowns extend into the canopy of codominant and dominant trees.
They receive little direct light from above and none from the sides. As
a result, intermediate trees usually have small crowns and are very
crowded from the sides.
Trees with crowns entirely below the general level of the crown
canopy that receive no direct sunlight either from above or the sides
Item 25--ROTTEN/MISSING CULL (c)
Record the percent rotten or missing cubic-foot cull for all live tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH
and all standing dead tally trees ≥ 5.0 inches DBH.
Record the percentage of rotten and missing cubic-foot volume, to the nearest 1 percent.
When estimating volume loss (tree cull), only consider the cull on the merchantable
bole/portion of the tree, from a 1-foot stump to a 4-inch top. Do not include any cull estimate
above ACTUAL LENGTH.
Rotten and missing volume loss is often difficult to estimate. Refer to supplemental disease
and insect pests field guides and local defect guidelines as an aid in identifying damaging
agents and their impact on volume loss. Use your best judgment and be alert to such defect
indicators as the following:
•
Cankers or fruiting bodies.
•
Swollen or punky knots.
•
Dull, hollow sound of bole (use regional standards).
•
Large dead limbs, especially those with frayed ends.
•
Sawdust around the base of the tree.
You may use insect/disease laminated flash cards as a general guide for determining the
extent of rotten cull in the afflicted tree. Remember that these flash cards give board foot
volume loss estimates, so use them only as a rough guide for determining cubic foot volume
118
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
loss. As a general rule, only account for rotten cull that can be visibly detected such as: open
bole wounds, large rotten branch stobs, fruiting bodies, etc.
There is also a cubic-foot volume table included in Appendix 6 (page 177) as an aid in
estimating rotten/missing cull. Do not include evidence of rot which is obtained solely by
coring the tree.
When Collected: All live and standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in. d.b.h.
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10%
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 0 to 99
Item 26--AK tree class (Z)
Record the tree class code that best describes the general quality of the tree or sapling. Use
the definitions for each of the codes provided to help in determining tree or sapling quality. If
the tree is dead (PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and STANDING DEAD =1) then the tree
must get a code 5 or 6.
When collected: All live trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h., all dead trees ≥ 5.0 inches d.b.h. when AK
STANDING DEAD = 1, and all live saplings.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 70% of the time
Values:
Code Description
Growing stock:
• A live sapling (1.0 - 4.9 inches dbh) with minor or no evidence
of form defects, insects, or disease, that is expected to become
a sound tree 5.0 inches dbh or larger with good form and vigor.
2
• A live tree, 5.0 inches dbh or larger, that has less than 75% of
the merchantable volume cull, and contains at least one solid
8-foot section reasonably free from form defect , on the
merchantable bole.
Rough cull: Trees that do not now, or prospectively, have at least
one solid 8 foot section, reasonably free of form defect, on the
3
merchantable bole OR have 75% or more of the merchantable volume
cull: and more than half of this cull is due to sound dead wood cubicfoot loss or severe form defect volume loss.
Rotten cull: Trees with 75 % or more of the merchantable volume
4
cull, and more than half of this cull is due to rotten or missing cubicfoot volume loss.
Hard Dead: A standing dead tree, 5.0 inch dbh or larger, that has a
5
minimum of 25% of the original merchantable volume sound (less
than 75% rotten and/or missing).
Soft Dead: A standing dead tree, 5.0 inch dbh or larger, that has less
6
than 25% of the original merchantable volume sound (more than 75%
rotten and/or missing).
119
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
NOTE: You are not required to have 75% rotten/missing cull in order for a tree to qualify for
code 4 (rotten cull). Just be sure that more than half of of the total 75% merchantable volume
cull is attributed to rotten/missing cull. Example: A tree has form (rough) cull and rotten cull in it’s
merchantable bole. The total merchantable cull (combined rough and rotten) equals 80%, the
rough cull is determined to make up about 65% of the entire amount (80%), thus the tree class
code for the tree would be 3 (rough cull).
Item 27--DECAY CLASS (d)
Record for each standing dead tree, 5.0-inch in diameter and larger, indicating the trees
stage of decay.
It is unlikely that decay class 5 will apply to a tally tree; by the time a dead tree has reached
decay class 5, it will likely have toppled over or have become too short to qualify for tally.
When Collected: All standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in d.b.h.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: +/- 1 class
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: Use the following table for guidelines:
Snag characteristics1
Decay
Class
(code)
Limbs and
Branches
Top
% Bark
Remaining
Sapwood
Presence
Sapwood
Condition
1
All present
Pointed
100
Intact
Sound, incipient
decay, hard,
original color
Sound, hard, original
color
2
Few limbs,
no fine
branches
Sloughing
Advanced
decay, fibrous,
firm to soft, light
brown
Sound at base, incipient
decay in outer edge of
upper bole, hard, light
to reddish brown
Sloughing
Fibrous, soft,
light to reddish
brown
Incipient decay at base,
advanced decay
throughout upper bole,
fibrous, hard to firm,
reddish brown
Sloughing
Cubical, soft,
reddish to dark
brown
Advanced decay at
base, sloughing from
upper bole, fibrous to
cubical, soft, dark
reddish brown
3
4
5
1
Limb stubs
Few or no
stubs
None
Broken
Broken
Broken
Broken
Variable
Variable
Variable
Less than
20
Gone
Gone
Heartwood Condition
Sloughing, cubical, soft,
dark brown, OR fibrous,
very soft, dark reddish
brown, encased in
hardened shell
Characteristics are for Douglas-fir. Snags for other species may vary somewhat; use this table as a guide.
120
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Item 28--AK MORTALITY YEAR
Record the estimated year that tree died or was cut. For each tree that has died or been cut,
record the 4-digit year in which the tree died. Mortality year is also recorded for trees on
land that has been converted to a nonforest land use, if it can be determined that a tree died
before the land was converted. If
When Collected: Plots where SAMPLE KIND = 1 or 2: all PREVIOUS TREE STATUS = 1
and PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 or 3; or PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 and
RECONCILE = 1, 2, 3, or 9.
Field width: 4 digits
Tolerance:+/- 1 year for remeasurement cycles of 5 years
+/- 2 years for remeasurement cycles of > 5 years
MQO: At least 70% of the time
Values: Year since previous visit
Item 29--AK CAUSE OF DEATH (cd)
Record a cause of death for all trees that have died or been cut since the previous survey. If
on a plot for first time (SAMPLE KIND = 1), then estimate the cause of death. If cause of
death cannot be reliably estimated (usually within the last 5 years), record unknown/not sure.
When Collected: When any PRESENT TREE STATUS = 2 or 3
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 80% of the time
Values:
Code
10
20
30
40
50
60
CAUSE OF DEATH
Insect
Disease
Fire
Animal
Weather
Vegetation (suppression, competition, vines/kudzu)
121
Annual Inventory 2005
VIII. TREE AND SAPLING DATA
70
80
Unknown/not sure/other- includes death from human activity not related
to silvicultural or landclearing activity (accidental, random, etc.) Tree
notes required.
Silvicultural or landclearing activity (death caused by harvesting or other
silvicultural activity, including girdling, chaining, etc., or to landclearing
activity)
Item 30--TREE NOTES
Record notes pertaining to an individual tree as called for to explain or describe another
variable.
TREE NOTES are available for each individual tree record and are accessible by pushing
the F4 key while the cursor is anywhere on the current tree record.
When collected: All trees.
Field width: 40
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: English language words, phrases and number
NOTES:
122
Annual Inventory 2005
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
General instructions
Site trees are a measure of site productivity expressed by the height to age relationship of
dominant and co-dominant trees. If suitable site trees are available, site tree data are required
for every accessible forest land condition class defined on a plot. An individual site tree may be
used for more than one condition class where differences in condition classes are not the result
of differences in site productivity. For example, when different condition classes are caused
solely due to differences in RESERVED STATUS, OWNER CLASS, and/or disturbance-related
differences in DENSITY (e.g., heavily thinned vs. unthinned), a site tree may be used for more
than one condition class. When in doubt, do not use a site tree for more than one condition
class.
Selection criteria
Select at least three site trees for the tree species that defines the forest type for each
accessible forest land condition class. Select trees off the subplot where possible. Use only
trees that have remained in a dominant or co-dominant crown position throughout their entire life
span. If possible, trees should be 5.0 inches in diameter, or larger, and at least 20 years old.
Ideally, site trees in the western U.S. should be between 35-80 years old. If preferred trees
cannot be found in the age range, expand the age range to 15-250 years. Try to reject trees that
are visibly damaged, trees with ring patterns that exhibit signs of stature suppression, trees with
abnormalities at DBH, and trees with rotten cores.
If there are no site trees that meet the acceptable criteria above, then select trees that
match the definitions as closely as possible. This can include less desirable trees such as
trees greater than 250 years old, dead, wolf, or site suppressed trees. Record the
appropriate “AK questionable site/age tree” flag for those site trees not meeting the
selection criteria.
Note: For Re-measurement Plots: if the forest type has changed from the initial visit,
collect additional site/age trees as needed so that, including previously measured site/age
trees, three site/age trees have been collected for each forest type species. Previous
site/age trees will be downloaded into the data recorder, plus they will be printed on data
sheets included in the plot folder.
Also: If there is a change in the numbering of condition classes from the previous visit, it
is important that “old” site/age trees have their CONDITION CLASS LIST updated to
reflect the changes. Example: previous field visit had CC 1 = forest and CC 2 = nonforest,
current visit reverses the numbers due to a procedural change or corerection of previous
errors (the condition class numbers are switched to correct ,CC1=nonforest, CC2=forest)
then the “old” site/age strees would need a change in CONDITION CLASS LIST from 1 to
2.
Site trees should be selected in the following order of preference:
1st Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below.
2nd Choice: not representative of the stand, any suitable tree on the list below
Note: in Alaska “representative of the stand” means a species that defines the forest type.
123
Annual Inventory 2005
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
Species
Associated Forest
Common Name
Code
Type Code
-------------------- Alaska Softwood Species -------------------011
Pacific silver fir
264
019
subalpine fir
268
094
white spruce
122
095
black spruce
125
098
Sitka spruce
305
108
lodgepole pine
281
242
western redcedar
304
263
western hemlock
301
264
mountain hemlock
270
-------------------- Alaska Hardwood Species -------------------351
red alder
911
375
paper birch
902
746
quaking aspen
901
747
black cottonwood
703
When Collected:
New plots: all accessible forest conditions on new plots
Remeasurement plots: When forest type changes from initial visit OR site/age trees from
previous visit do not meet selection criteria and acceptable site/age trees can be found
OR < 3 site/age trees of appropriate species were recorded during the previous visit and
acceptable site/age trees (for a total of 3 per condition) can be found.
Alaska age tree selection
Select three live age trees per accessible forested condition. Each tree should represent
plurality (majority) of the predominant STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition. In uneven aged
stands, use the tree age that represents plurality of tree composition in the stand.
Age trees are used to compute stand age for any sampled accessible forest land conditions.
Alaska Remeasurement Plots: if the forest type has changed from the initial visit, collect
additional age trees as needed so that, including previously measured age trees, a total of three
age trees exist for each accessible forest condition.
D. Site tree data variables
For each site/age tree, record the following items:
Item 1--AK site/age tree number (No)
Automatically records a code indicating the assigned number for each site/age tree record
on a plot. Numbers will be pre-assigned to downloaded/printed site trees. The data recorder
will automatically assign a number to each new site/age tree (in sequential order).
124
Annual Inventory 2005
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
When collected: Previous visit site/age trees downloaded, new site/age trees number
entered automatically in sequential order.
Field width: 2
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 100% of the time
Values: 01 - 99
Item 2--SUBPLOT NUMBER (Sb)
Record the subplot number to which the site/age tree is referenced. Record a 1 digit code
indicating the number of the subplot on which a site/age tree is on or near. Subplot numbers
for site/age trees previously collected will be downloaded/printed if on file.
When Collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code
1
2
3
4
Description
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
Item 3--AK site/age tree status
This variable is used to determine if this site/age tree is old “O”, new “N”, or invalid old “I”. If
the site/age has been downloaded from the previous visit, then an “O” will be displayed next
to the subplot number. If the site/age is new “N” then it has been copied from a tree record or
entered manually (as a non-tally site tree). If an old site/age tree ( “O”) is determined to be
previously collected in error, or a crew does not feel it best represents the forest condition
and can replace it with a better representative tree, then change the site/age tree status
code from “O” to “I”.
When collected: downloaded tree records will automatically get status of “O”. New tree
records will get status of “N”.
Field width: 1
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values:
Code
N
New site/age tree
O
Old site/age tree
I
Invalid “Old”
site/age tree
Description
copied from current tree tally or entered
manually as non-tally tree
downloaded from previous plot visit)
only to be used for procedural differences or
previous crew selection error or if better stand
representative site/age trees are now available
125
Annual Inventory 2005
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
Item 4--AK site/age tree type
Record the appropriate type of site, age, or combination that this tree record represents.
When collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 1
Tolerance: no errors
MQO: at least 95% of the time
Values:
Code
1
2
3
Definition
Site tree
Age tree
Site and Age tree
Item 5--AK questionable site/age tree flag
Record the appropriate code to identify whether the current site/age tree meets (or does not
meet) the selection criteria as outlined above.
Reamesurement Note: If AK site/age tree status = “O” (old) then any site/age trees that also
have a downloaded “AK questionable site/age tree flag” of S, A, or B will need to be replaced
with a new site/age that meets the selection criteria outlined above. If a site/age tree that
better represents the condition is measured and entered as a replacement, then the old “O”
site/age tree should then be changed to “I” (invalid old site/age tree).
When collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 1
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 70% of the time
Values:
Code
Description
C
selection criteria met
S
Site tree does not meet selection criteria
A
Age tree does not meet selection criteria
B
Both site & age trees do not meet selection criteria
Item 6--CONDITION CLASS LIST (C)
List all CONDITION CLASSES that the site index data from this tree represent.
List all CONDITION CLASSES associated with this tree record, regardless of type (i.e.
whether it is site, age, or both) and regardless of whether it is a new “N” or old “O” tree
record.
Remeasurement Note: On a remeasurement plot, if there is a change in condition
assignment from previous visit due to a crew error or change in procedure (ex. last visit a
condition (polygon) was assigned as 1 and this visit the condition was changed or corrected
to 2); then crews should re-assign all “Old” site trees that are still valid, to the proper
condition as assigned during the current visit.
126
Annual Inventory 2005
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
When Collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 56789
Item 7--AK TREE RECORD NUMBER (Trn)
This number is usually automatically recorded when the site/age tree is copied from a tally
tree record or it is a downloaded “old” site/age tally tree (from the previous visit). However,
“000” should be entered on all “new” site/age trees that are not tallied in the tree data screen
(i.e. non tally site/age trees).
When collected: downloaded site/age tally trees, trees copied from the tree data screen,
and “000” for all non-tally site/age trees.
Field width: 3
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: At least 99% of the time
Values: 000-999
Item 8--AZIMUTH (Azm)
Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center; sight the center of the base of each tree with
a compass. Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north.
Record an azimuth for new site/age trees. Record the azimuth even if the site/age tree is not
within 24.0 feet of a subplot center.
When Collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10 degrees
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 360
Item 9--HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Hdst)
Record the measured HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 ft, from the subplot
center to the pith of the tree at the base.
When Collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 4 digits (xxx.y)
Tolerance: +/- 5 ft
MQO:
At least 90% of the time
Values: 000.1 to 200.0
Item 10--SPECIES (Spc)
Species is downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. Record for new site/age
trees.
When Collected: All site/age trees
Values:
127
Annual Inventory 2005
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
CODE
011
019
042
094
095
098
108
231
SPECIES
Pacific silver fir
subalpine fir
Alaska yellow-cedar
white spruce
black spruce
sitka spruce
lodegepole pine
Pacific yew
CODE
242
263
264
351
375
746
747
SPECIES
western redcedar
western hemlock
mountain hemlock
red alder
paper birch
quaking aspen
black cottonwood
Item 11--DIAMETER (Dbh)
Use the same procedures and tolerances described on page 108.
Diameter is downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. Record for new site/age
trees.
When Collected: All site/age trees
Item 12--SITE TREE LENGTH (Ht)
With a clinometer or other approved instrument, measure the total length of the site tree from
the ground to the top of the tree. Record to the nearest 1.0 foot. SITE TREE LENGTH must
be measured; no estimates are permitted on site trees.
Downloaded for site/age trees previously collected. However, if the downloaded site/age tree
is missing the SITE TREE LENGTH then the crew should make an attempt to
When Collected: All site trees and new age trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 10% of true length
MQO: At least 90% of the time
Values: 005 to 999
Item 13--TREE AGE AT DIAMETER (Age)
Record the tree age as determined by an increment sample. Bore the tree just below the
point of diameter measurement (d.b.h.) with an increment borer. Count the rings between
the outside edge of the core and the pith. Do not add years to get total age.
Downloaded for site/age trees previously collected.
When Collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 5 years
MQO: At least 95% of the time
Values: 001 to 999
Determining breast-height age of large trees: To determine the age of a tree whose
radius is greater than the length of the increment borer, use the following procedure.
To access the extrapolated age utility on the field data recorder: push Ctrl + Z while the Age
field is highlighted, enter in all the data required (see steps below and use F1 help screens
as needed). When finished, the extrapolated age should be entered into the Age field. Make
128
Annual Inventory 2005
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
sure that AK age determination method (next variable) gets a code of 2, showing age is
extrapolated.
1. Bore into the tree as far as possible, extract the core, and count the rings.
2. Count the number of rings in the inner 2 inches of the core.
3. Measure the total length of the extracted core to the nearest 0.1 inch. (include the
entire thickness of bark, even though some of it may not be in the core because it
crumbled or the tree was cored in a bark furrow)
4. Divide the tree's diameter by 2.
5. Subtract (3) from (4). This gives you the distance by which you are short of reaching
tree center.
6. Divide this number (5) by 2. This tells you how many 2-inch lengths you were short by.
7. Multiply this number (6) by the number of rings in inner 2 inches (2).
8. Add this number (7) to the total number of rings in the extracted core (1). This is the
tree's estimated breast-high age.
9. Make sure that AK age determination method (next variable) gets a code of 2,
showing age is extrapolated.
Example: Determine the age of a 59.6-inch Douglas-fir. The core has 110 rings, and has
10 rings in the inner 2 inches. 0.8 in. of the 16.4-inch-long increment borer did not penetrate
the tree. Each number below is associated with its corresponding step above:
Step 1: 110 rings counted
Step 2: 10 rings in the inner 2 in. of the core
Step 3: 14.6 in. of core was extracted + 1 in of bark that was not in the core = 15.6
Step 4: 59.6 in. is the tree’s diameter and you then divide by 2 = 29.8 in. to center of tree
(pith)
Step 5: 29.8 in. (true center) – 15.6 in. (measured core) = 14.2 in. short of reaching the
pith
Step 6: 14.2 in./ 2 = 7.1 (2 in.) lengths short
Step 7: 7.1 (from step6) x 10 (from step 2) = 71 rings not counted
Step 8: 110 rings counted (step 1) + 71 rings not counted (step 7) = 181 years old at BH
Step 9: for Item 14 use code 2 (bored and extrapolated age)
After boring a tree for age, leave the extracted increment core at the base of the tree (for the
convenience of QA inspection).
Item 14--AK age determination method
Record the code that best describes how the age was determined in the field.
When collected: All site/age trees
Field width: 1
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
Code Description
1
Bored age
2
Bored and extrapolated (core bit cannot reach the center of the tree)
129
Annual Inventory 2005
IX. SITE TREE INFORMATION
Item 15--SITE TREE NOTES
Record notes pertaining to an individual site tree.
Record notes to clarify or describe a situation in the individual site tree record (line) by
pushing the F4 key.
When collected: All site trees as necessary
Field width: 40
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: Single words and abbreviated sentances
NOTES:
130
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
Table of Contents
A. INTRODUCTION …………………………………………………………………………………132
B. VEGETATION SAMPLE DESIGN
C. VEGETATION PROFILE PLOT AND VISIT REFERENCE INFORMATION…………..…132
Item 1--STATE
Item 2--PLOT NUMBER
Item 3--QA STATUS
Item 4--CREW TYPE
Item 5--SAMPLE KIND
Item 6--VEGETATION PROFILE VISIT DATE
Item 7--VEGETATION PROFILE CREW NAME
Item 8--VEGETATION PROFILE PLOT NOTES
D. SUBPLOT COMMUNITY TYPE & COVER
BY GROWTH-HABIT GROUP, BARE SOIL, & TOTAL VEGETATION…………..…135
Item 9--SUBPLOT NUMBER
Item 10--COMMUNITY DESCRIPTION FOR SPECIMEN LABELS
Item 11--TREE PERCENT COVER
Item 12--SHRUB PERCENT COVER
Item 13--FORB PERCENT COVER
Item 14--GRAMINOID PERCENT COVER
Item 15--TOTAL VEGETATION PERCENT COVER
Item 16--BARE SOIL PERCENT COVER
Item 17--VEGETATION SUBPLOT NOTES
E. SUBPLOT SPECIES RECORDS………………………………………………………….…..137
Item 18--SPECIES CODE
Item 19--UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER
Item 20--SPECIMEN OFFICIALLY COLLECTED
Item 21--SPECIMEN LABEL NUMBER
Item 22--SPECIMEN NOT OFFICIALLY COLLECTED REASON CODE
Item 23--SPECIES NOTES
Item 24--SPECIES GROWTH HABIT
Item 25--SPECIES TOTAL PERCENT COVER………………………………………….….….140
Item 26--SPECIES HEIGHT
Item 27--SPECIES PERCENT COVER LAYER 1 AND 2.....................................................141
Item 28--SPECIES PERCENT COVER LAYER 3
Item 29--SPECIES PERCENT COVER LAYER 4
F. Suggested field gear unique to vegetation specialist…………………………………...142
G. UNKNOWN PLANTS AND VOUCHER SPECIMEN COLLECTION
H. CODES FOR UNKNOWN PLANTS…………………………………………………………..145
131
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
A. INTRODUCTION
The objectives of the Phase 2 (P2) Vegetation Profile are to measure the amount and vertical layering
of the most abundant and characteristic trees, shrubs, forbs/herbs/ferns, and grasses, on forested
portions of each P2 plot. Information on the abundance, structure, and species composition of
understory plant communities has many uses. The data is used to evaluate wildlife habitat suitability,
forage availability, grazing potential, species’ distribution and abundance, fire hazard, abundance of
non-timber forest products, and potential site productivity. The data also supports identification of
plant community types (“associations”), which allows users to predict plot characteristics not actually
measured by FIA. Accurately representing the species present on a site and their change in
abundance in response to forest development, disturbance, or management is therefore important to
a wide variety of users. This information is also used to augment forest ecosystem health
assessments from P3 plots, in terms of vegetation structure and rates of change of community
composition for both native and non-native vascular plant species.
Data will be collected by crew members who have been trained and certified in the Vegetation Profile
methods. These crew members are expected to have had previous botanical training and knowledge
of regional flora. (While we can provide some refresher training in local flora, the skills needed to be
an effective field vegetation specialist are beyond the scope of what we can provide during a short
training period at the beginning of the field season).
B. VEGETATION SAMPLE DESIGN
Phase 2 sampling of vegetation on Alaska Wilderness Plots is focused on any accessible condition
classes (forested or not) within the 24.0-foot radius subplot. (Standard P2 sampling focuses on
accessible forest conditions only). If multiple accessible forested condition classes are present on the
subplot, a single vegetation estimate is made for the combined area on the subplot. Canopy cover
estimates are only made for the area within accessible condition(s).
Canopy cover and average heights of the most common species are estimated. Total cover estimates
for all species grouped by growth-habit and for bare ground are also made. Vegetation is best
measured before plants are trampled in the course of installing the rest of the plot.
Specimens of all measured plants that cannot be confidently identified to the species level, and are
present at ≥1% cover on at least 1 subplot and with sufficient live material to be potentially identified,
are collected off-plot and submitted to regional botanists for subsequent identification.
Quality assurance measurements should be made within 2 weeks of the original plot visit. Ideally, the
timing of re-measurement plot visits should be within 2 weeks of the calendar date of the original
measurement - if at all possible - to limit the effect of seasonal phenological changes in cover. The
goal is to sample the plots at roughly the same phenological stage on each visit.
C. VEGETATION PROFILE PLOT AND VISIT REFERENCE INFORMATION
Item 1--STATE
Record the unique FIPS code identifying the State where the plot center is located.
When collected: All plots currently having at least one accessible condition.
Field width: 2 digits
132
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: 02
Item 2--PLOT NUMBER
Record the identification number, unique within a county, parish, or borough (survey unit in
AK), for each plot. If SAMPLE KIND = 3, the plot number will be assigned by the National
Information Management System (NIMS).
When collected: All plots currently having at least one accessible condition
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: 00000 – 99999
Item 3--QA STATUS
Record the code corresponding to the type of vegetation measurement conducted.
When collected: All plots currently having at least one accessible condition
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Standard field production plot
Cold Check
Reference plot (off grid)
Training/Practice plot (off grid)
Botched Plot file (disregard during data
processing)
Blind Check
Hot Check (production plot)
Item 4--CREW TYPE
Record the code corresponding to the type of crew measuring the vegetation profile.
When collected: All plots currently having at least one accessible forest condition
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
1
2
Regular field crew
QA crew (any QA crew member present
collecting data)
133
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
Item 5--SAMPLE KIND
Record sample kind.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
Initial plot establishment
Remeasure of previously
established plot
Replacement plot
Item 6--VEGETATION PROFILE VISIT DATE
Enter the month, day, and year in which the sampling on the location being measured was
completed.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 - month, 2 - day, and 4 - year
Tolerance: no errors
MQO: 100% of the time
Values: Month:
Month
Code
Month
January
01
May
February
02
June
March
03
July
April
04
August
Code
05
06
07
08
Month
September
October
November
December
Day: 1-31
Year: ≥ 2005
Item 7--VEGETATION PROFILE CREW NAME
Record the name of the crew member measuring the vegetation profile.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 20 Characters
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: Lastname, firstname
Item 8--VEGETATION PROFILE PLOT NOTES
Use these fields to record notes pertaining to the entire plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: Unlimited alphanumeric character field
Tolerance: N/A
134
Code
09
10
11
12
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
MQO: N/A
Values: English language words, phrases and number
D. SUBPLOT COMMUNITY TYPE AND COVER BY GROWTH-HABIT GROUP,
BARE SOIL, AND TOTAL VEGETATION
Cover is estimated for the combined species in each FIA growth-habit group, for all vascular plants
combined, and for bare soil on accessible forest conditions on the subplot. Cover procedures are
identical as those for species, except that species are combined, so that cover is estimated as the
percent of the subplot that would be obscured by all plants in a group if viewed from directly above.
Total percent cover for a plant growth-habit group cannot exceed 100 percent. Total percent cover
for a plant group will rarely exceed the sum of total percent covers recorded for individual species
records in that group by more than 5% (allowing for the combined cover of unrecorded species
present at <3% cover). However, total percent cover for a plant group often is less than the sum of
cover for all individual species within the group because of overlap between layers and species.
Item 9--SUBPLOT NUMBER
Record the code corresponding to the number of the subplot.
When collected: On all plots with at least one accessible condition
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
Code Subplot location
1
Center subplot
2
North subplot
3
Southeast subplot
4
Southwest subplot
Item 10--COMMUNITY DESCRIPTION FOR SPECIMEN LABELS
To fully automate the Specimen Label, enter a brief description of the community type to aid
taxonomist in the identification of any specimens collected from this subplot. Community
descriptions often describe the dominant overstory species (i.e.: Open mixed conifer, closed paper
birch, alder-willow shrub, bearberry tundra)
When collected: each subpplot
Field width: 40 characters
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99 % of the time
Values: English words or phrases that describe plant community
135
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
Item 11--TREE PERCENT COVER
Estimate the cover for all tree growth-habit vegetation (TR) on the subplot (regardless of height).
Include vegetation not recorded as individual species.
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: 90% of the time
Values: 0-100
Item 12--SHRUB PERCENT COVER
Estimate the cover for all non-tree woody growth-habit vegetation (SH, SS, LI) on the subplot.
Include vegetation not recorded as individual species.
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: 90 % of the time
Values: 0-100
Item 13--FORB PERCENT COVER
Estimate the cover for all forb growth-habit vegetation (FB) on the subplot. Include vegetation not
recorded as individual species.
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: 90% of the time
Values: 0-100
Item 14--GRAMINOID PERCENT COVER
Estimate the cover for all graminoid growth-habit vegetation (GR) on the subplot. Include
vegetation not recorded as individual species.
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
Values: 0-100
Item 15--TOTAL VEGETATION PERCENT COVER
Estimate the cover for all vegetation on the subplot (regardless of height).
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: 90% of the time
Values: 0-100
Item 16--BARE SOIL PERCENT COVER
Estimate the cover of bare soil on the subplot. For this assessment, bare soil is defined as
mineral material soil that, viewed from above, is not over-topped by grass, forbs, shrubs, or tree
seedlings or saplings. Cover by trees >5 in d.b.h. is ignored. It is also not covered by duff, litter,
cowpies, woody debris, moss or other material. Sand, stones and bedrock are not considered
bare soil. This data is used to help make estimates of erosion, range condition and disturbance. It
therefore includes only areas of bare soil having no cover at all, or only the cover of crowns on
trees > 5.0 in. d.b.h.
136
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
Tolerance: Cover estimates should be within one class of actual cover, based on the cover
classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 21-40%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: 90% of the time
Values: 0-100
Item 17--VEGETATION SUBPLOT NOTES
Use these fields to record notes pertaining to the vegetation found on the subplot. If the notes apply
only to some other specific aspect of the subplot, then make that clear in the notes or record
elsewhere.
When collected: All subplots, as needed.
Field width: Unlimited alphanumeric character field
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: English language words, phrases and numbers
E. SUBPLOT SPECIES RECORDS
The vegetation specialist does a search of the entire accessible condition area of the subplot,
ignoring any forest/nonforest condition class boundaries. Only species rooted in or overhanging the
subplot are included. For tree species, there are no minimum height limits as are required for
seedling counts. Only emergent plants are recorded in wetland forest situations. Epiphytes (Spanish
moss, ferns, orchids, mistletoes) are recorded as best as possible as seen from the ground level. All
vegetation and plant parts that are or were alive during the current growing season are included in the
cover estimates (e.g. frosted horsetails (Equisetum sp.) in late summer).
Individual cover is estimated on accessible conditions on each 24.0-foot radius subplot for all vascular
plant species with ≥ 1% total foliar cover in all layers. Begin with the most apparently abundant
vascular plants (with the greatest canopy cover) and limit your search of species to approximately 30
minutes.
For each species, total cover and cover in each of three fixed layers is estimated. Each record is
identified by growth habit, species code, total cover, height, and separate covers in 3 fixed layers,
where present.
Item 18--SPECIES CODE
Record a code for each vascular plant species found rooted in or overhanging the accessible
condition(s) within the subplot. Species codes must be the standardized codes in the Natural
Resource Conservation Service (NRCS) PLANTS database January 2000 version. Identification
to species only is expected. However, if subspecies information is known, enter the appropriate
NRCS code.
If a species cannot be identified quickly and confidently, assign a NRCS PLANTS genus or
unknown code appropriate to the species. Acceptable Unknown codes are given in section G.
Collect a specimen unless the species is locally sparse or another Not Collected Reason (Item 7)
applies. A species is “locally sparse” if five or fewer plants are present in the entire plot (4
subplots) and immediate surrounding area.
137
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
When collected: All subplots with subplot status = 1
Field width: 10 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: Accepted NRCS species when the species is known, or a NRCS accepted genus or
unknown code when the species is not known.
Item 19--UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER
When any code is entered for the first time on a plot, the UNIQUE SPECIES NUMBER is “1”. If
more than one unidentified species is discovered that is described by the same genus or unknown
code, the next sequential number is assigned. If a recorded unidentified species is encountered
again elsewhere on the plot, the Vegetation Specialist must record the UNIQUE SPECIES
NUMBER that corresponds to the earlier encountered specimen.
When collected: All species records.
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: 1-99, assigned in sequential numbers
Item 20--SPECIMEN OFFICIALLY COLLECTED
Record if a specimen was collected or not for each species, genus or unknown code entered as a
new unique species
When collected: For all codes.
Field width: 1 digit
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
1
Yes, a specimen was officially collected
0
No, a specimen was not officially collected
Item 21--SPECIMEN LABEL NUMBER
Record the label number for the collected specimen. Numbered labels are provided to each
vegetation specialist by your regional coordinator.
When collected: SPECIMEN OFFICIALLY COLLECTED = 1
Field width: 5 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 99999, as pre-printed and assigned by region.
Item 22--SPECIMEN NOT OFFICIALLY COLLECTED REASON CODE
Record the code that describes why a specimen has not been collected.
138
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
When collected: an unknown code or genus code is entered and SPECIMEN OFFICIALLY
COLLECTED = 0
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time
Values:
Code
01
03
04
05
06
10
Description
Species is locally sparse
Hazardous situation
Time limitation
Already collected with previous entry of genus or unknown code with the same
unique species number
Specimen collected for immediate/local identification only
Other – explain in notes
Item 23--SPECIES NOTES
Notes may be entered for any species encountered, but are required for each new species that is
not identified. Enter text that describes the species. This text may be used in the specimen label
and Unknown Report.
When collected: Required for any new unidentified species encountered on plot and when
SPECIMEN NOT COLLECTED REASON = 10.
Field width: Unlimited alphanumeric character field.
Tolerance: N/A
MQO: N/A
Values: English language words, phrases, and numbers
Item 24--SPECIES GROWTH HABIT
Each individual species record must have a growth habit code recorded. Do not split species
records based on growth habit; if a species has more than one growth habit on plot, only record
the predominate growth habit for the species. Valid growth habit codes for the FIA inventory are
derived from the PLANTS database (USDA, NRCS.2000).
Tolerance: No errors
MQO: 99% of the time.
Values: Direct From NRCS: Growth Habits Codes and Definitions)
PLANTS
Growth
Habit
Code
PLANTS
Description
PLANTS Definition
Notes
FB
Forb/herb
Vascular plant without significant woody tissue above or at the
ground. Forbs and herbs may be annual, biennial, or perennial
but always lack significant thickening by secondary woody
growth and have perennating buds borne at or below the
ground surface. In PLANTS, graminoids are excluded but
ferns, horsetails, lycopods, and whisk-ferns are included.
Applies to vascular plants only.
Federal Geographic Data
Committee (FGDC) definition
includes graminoids, forbs, and
ferns.
139
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
GR
Graminoid
Grass or grass-like plant, including grasses (Poaceae), sedges
(Cyperaceae), rushes (Juncaceae), arrow-grasses
(Juncaginaceae), and quillworts (Isoetes).
Applies to vascular plants only.
An herb in the FGDC
classification.
LI
Liana
Climbing plant found in tropical forests with long, woody ropelike stems of anomalous anatomical structure.
Applies to vascular plants only.
Mutually exclusive with VI (Vine).
A shrub in the FGDC
classification.
SH
Shrub
Perennial, multi-stemmed woody plant that is usually less than
4 to 5 meters (13 to 16 feet) in height. Shrubs typically have
several stems arising from or near the ground, but may be
taller than 5 meters or single-stemmed under certain
environmental conditions.
Applies to vascular plants only.
SS
Subshrub
Low-growing shrub usually under 0.5 m (1.5 feet) tall, never
exceeding 1 meter (3 feet) tall at maturity.
Applies to vascular plants only.
A dwarf-shrub in the FGDC
classification. Includes
Includes succulents (e.g.
cacti).
succulents (e.g. cacti).
TR
Tree
Perennial, woody plant with a single stem (trunk), normally
greater than 4 to 5 meters (13 to 16 feet) in height; under
certain environmental conditions, some tree species may
develop a multi-stemmed or short growth form (less than 4
meters or 13 feet in height).
Applies to vascular plants only.
VI
Vine
Twining/climbing plant with relatively long stems, can be
woody or herbaceous.
Applies to vascular plants only.
Mutually exclusive with LI
(Liana). FGDC classification
considers woody vines to be
shrubs and herbaceous vines to
be herbs.
Item 25--SPECIES TOTAL PERCENT COVER
A rapid canopy cover estimate is made for each species for all foliage across all layer heights.
Canopy cover is based on a vertically-projected polygon described by the outline of the foliage,
ignoring any normal spaces occurring between the leaves of plants (Daubenmire 1959). Cover is
estimated over the entire accessible portion of the subplot, ignoring any boundaries between
condition(s). However, the foliage cover is always estimated as a percent of an entire subplot.
That is, if the cover for a given species is about equal to a circle with a radius of 5.3 ft, the cover
estimate will always be 5%, even if only 30% of the subplot is in accessible condition.
If cover is greater than 0 but less than 1 percent, the species is not recorded. For any species
record, total cover must be less than or equal to the sum of cover assigned for all layers, but
greater than or equal to the greatest cover assigned for any one layer (greatest single layer cover
< total cover < sum of all layers).
For species of moderate cover, it may be easiest to divide the subplots into quarters, estimate
canopy cover of each quarter separately, and then add them together. The following area-cover
sizes may be useful in developing estimates for an entirely forested subplot:
140
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
Subplot radius = 24.0 feet, Subplot area = 1809 ft2
Length of a side of a Radius of circular
Cover Area (ft2)
square(ft)
area(ft)
1%
18
4.3
2.4
3%
54
7.4
4.1
5%
90
9.5
5.3
10%
181
13.4
7.6
20%
362
19
10.7
When collected: Each subplot species record
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 class based on the following canopy cover classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 2140%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: at least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 100
Item 26--SPECIES HEIGHT
For each species record the average height above ground level of the species’ foliage across the
accessible conditions on the subplot to the nearest foot.
When collected: each species record
Field width: 2 digits
Tolerance: ± 3 ft.
MQO: 99% of the time
Values: 1 to 99
Item 27--SPECIES PERCENT COVER LAYER 1 AND 2
A rapid canopy cover estimate is made for the amount of foliage of each species in the combined
layer 1 and 2, or 0 - 6 ft. above ground level. Procedures are identical to those used for total
cover.
When collected: Each subplot species recorded
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 class based on the following canopy cover classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 2140%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: at least 90% of the time
Values: 000 to 100
Item 28--SPECIES PERCENT COVER LAYER 3
A rapid canopy cover estimate is made for the amount of foliage of each species in layer 3, or 6 16 ft. above ground level. Procedures are identical to those used for total cover.
When collected: Each subplot species recorded
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 class based on the following canopy cover classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 2140%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: at least 90% of the time
Values: 000 to 100
141
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
Item 29--SPECIES PERCENT COVER LAYER 4
A rapid canopy cover estimate is made for the amount of foliage of each species in layer 4, or >
16 ft. above ground level. Procedures are identical to those used for total cover.
When collected: Each subplot species recorded
Field width: 3 digits
Tolerance: +/- 1 class based on the following canopy cover classes: 1-5%, 6-10%, 11-20%, 2140%, 41-60%, 61-80%, and 81-100%
MQO: at least 90% of the time
Values: 000 to 100
F. Suggested field gear unique to vegetation specialist
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-gal plastic bags for unknown plant specimens
Carpenters ruler (for height measurements)
Hand lens
Pre-numbered labels for unknown plant specimens (provided)
Envelopes for bulky fruits or nuts
Local flora keys and species lists
Digging tool
Large boxes to store and ship samples
Newspaper and cardboard
Plant press
Access to dissecting scope with illuminator
Mailing instructions for samples (Region specific)
Diskettes for sending unknown sample information to herbaria
PLANTS code dictionary with cross-walk plant names to accepted codes
G. UNKNOWN PLANTS AND VOUCHER SPECIMEN COLLECTION
When you encounter a plant species with at least 1% cover that you do not recognize and you cannot
identify it quickly and confidently using field guides, but it is potentially identifiable, follow these basic
steps:
1.
Assign an Unknown code or Genus code
2.
Assign Specimen Label Number
3.
Make canopy cover and height estimates for the sample unit where species is encountered.
4.
Collect a sample off the subplot
If fewer than 5 of an unknown herbaceous plant species are present DO NOT COLLECT, assign a
genus or an accepted unknown code; and enter “1” for Item 7 – SPECIES NOT OFFICIALLY
COLLECTED.
142
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
Use a digging tool to extract the entire plant, including any underground portions, flowers, fruits, and
leaves. If the plant is abundant, collection of two samples will increase the likelihood of a good
specimen.
Collected unknown specimens should be transported in the field and from the field in the 1 and/or 2
gallon zip-lock bags provided. Only one species and label may be placed in a single bag.
Acceptable methods of transporting collected specimens include:
4.
•
Use a 3-hole-punch to punch holes in the bottom of your bags prior to traveling in the field.
Place the punched bags into a 2-inch 3-ring binder with the zip-lock portion facing outward.
Plants can then be placed with labels into the bag directly in the binder. This method
prevents crumpling, tearing, and destroying the specimen during transportation.
•
Use a 1-hole-punch to punch a hole in the one upper corner of each bag. The hole should
be placed in such a manner that it cannot easily be torn. Place the bags on an aluminum
carabineer (available at drug stores) or on heavy twine and fasten to your field vest or
backpack. Be careful to seal the plants and labels securely inside the bags to prevent
accidental loss.
Specimen Label
A set of pre-printed labels for unknown specimens (Figure 10.1) will be available for crews.
Pre-printed labels will already include a Label Number that is to be assigned to the unknown
specimen in the PDR program and should accompany the plant as it is collected, pressed,
dried, and shipped. Properly used labels are essential for tracking specimens and updating
species records.
Label Number:1
SPECIES CODE:
P3Hexagon: ………
Plot: 1
Subplot: 1
P3Quad:
Date: 8/06/03
Unknown Code:ACANT2 Unique Species Nbr:1
Veg Spec. crew: John Doe
State: MN
County: Hubbard
Community: Spruce-Fir
Notes: opposite leaves, square stem, purple
flowers, minty fragrance, possibly peppermint
Figure 10.1. Example of label for unknown specimen.
5.
Press and label if not identified by the end of the day
1. After returning to the field office print all of the labels associated with the collected
unknown specimens. The printed labels should now have all of the plot information (plot
number, state, notes, unknown code, etc.) in addition to the original label number, make
sure that the printed information is correct and matches the unknown specimen before
including it in the press.
143
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
2. Each specimen representing a unique species should be placed individually
inside a single layer of folded newsprint. Each specimen is to be accompanied
by its corresponding unknown specimen label. Small plant specimens are to
be pressed individually. Large plant specimens may be folded in a “v”, “z”, or
“w” arrangement to fit on a single newsprint page. Arrange the specimen so
that at least one upper and one lower leaf surface is exposed. Plants may be
trimmed to reduce bulk, so long as all diagnostic parts are included.
Diagnostic portions include stem sections, petioles, leaves, roots, flowers, and
fruits. Bulky fruits or nuts may be stored separately in a paper envelope that is
taped to the newsprint and is accompanied by an identical copy of the
specimen’s unknown label. Unknown codes can be written on the outside of the
folded newspaper to aid sorting as specimens are processed.
3. Stack the specimens in their individual newsprint sleeves between two pieces
of cardboard. Bind the cardboard and plants together using a piece of twine
or flat cloth ribbon wrapped around the length and width of the cardboard bundle. For
mailing numerous specimens, several bundles may be used. Place all bundles inside
a cardboard box for shipping.
Package and submit specimens as dictated by your region or lab. It is suggested that Unknown
specimens be packaged and shipped at the end of every work week. Exceptions will be made when
extended field excursions prevent the vegetation specialist from reaching a post office.
All packaged specimens are to be accompanied by a legible completed label. Unknown Reports
tracking collected unknown plants are generated from the PDR plot file.
NOTES:
144
Annual Inventory 2005
X. VEGETATION PROFILE for ALASKA WILDERNESS
H. Codes for unknown plants
2SSDB
Code
2FERN
2FORB
2FA
2FB
2FD
2FDA
2FDB
2FDP
2FM
2FMA
2FMB
2FMP
2FP
2FS
2FSA
2FSB
2FSP
2GRAM
2GA
2GB
2GP
2GW
2GL
2GLA
2GLB
2GLP
2PLANT
2SHRUB
2SB
2SD
2SDB
2SDBD
2SDBM
2SDN
2SE
2SEB
2SEBD
2SEBM
2SEN
2SN
2SS
2SSL
2SSS
2SUBS
2SSB
2SSD
Common Name
Fern or Fern Ally
Forb (herbaceous, not grass nor
grasslike)
Forb, annual
Forb, biennial
Forb, dicot
Forb, dicot, annual
Forb, dicot, biennial
Forb, dicot, perennial
Forb, monocot
Forb, monocot, annual
Forb, monocot, biennial
Forb, monocot, perennial
Forb, perennial
Forb, succulent
Forb, succulent, annual
Forb, succulent, biennial
Forb, succulent, perennial
Graminoid (grass or grasslike)
Grass, annual
Grass, biennial
Grass, perennial
Grass, woody (bamboo, etc.)
Grasslike (not a true grass)
Grasslike, annual
Grasslike, biennial
Grasslike, perennial
Plant
Shrub (>.5m)
Shrub, broadleaf
Shrub, deciduous
Shrub, deciduous, broadleaf
Shrub, deciduous, broadleaf, dicot
Shrub, deciduous, broadleaf, monocot
Shrub, deciduous, needleleaf
Shrub, evergreen
Shrub, evergreen, broadleaf
Shrub, evergreen, broadleaf, dicot
Shrub, evergreen, broadleaf, monocot
Shrub, evergreen, needleleaf
Shrub, needleleaf (coniferous)
Shrub, succulent
Shrub, succulent, leaf
Shrub, succulent, stem
Subshrub (<.5m)
Subshrub, broadleaf
Subshrub, deciduous
2SSDBD
2SSDBM
2SSDN
2SSE
2SSEB
2SSEBD
2SSEBM
2SSEN
2SSN
2SSS2
2SSSL
2SSSS
2TREE
2TB
2TD
2TDB
2TDBD
2TDBM
2TDN
2TE
2TEB
2TEBD
2TEBM
2TEN
2TN
2TS
2TSL
2TSS
2VH
2VHA
2VHD
2VHDA
2VHDP
2VHM
2VHMA
2VHMP
2VHP
2VHS
2VHSA
2VHSP
2VW
2VWD
2VWDD
2VWDM
2VWE
2VWED
2VWEM
145
Subshrub, deciduous, broadleaf
Subshrub, deciduous, broadleaf,
dicot
Subshrub, deciduous, broadleaf,
monocot
Subshrub, deciduous, needleleaf
Subshrub, evergreen
Subshrub, evergreen, broadleaf
Subshrub, evergreen, broadleaf, dicot
Subshrub, evergreen, broadleaf, monocot
Subshrub, evergreen, needleleaf
Subshrub, needleleaf (coniferous)
Subshrub, succulent
Subshrub, succulent, leaf
Subshrub, succulent, stem
Tree
Tree, broadleaf
Tree, deciduous
Tree, deciduous, broadleaf
Tree, deciduous, broadleaf, dicot
Tree, deciduous, broadleaf, monocot
Tree, deciduous, needleleaf
Tree, evergreen
Tree, evergreen, broadleaf
Tree, evergreen, broadleaf, dicot
Tree, evergreen, broadleaf, monocot
Tree, evergreen, needleleaf
Tree, needleleaf (coniferous)
Tree, succulent
Tree, succulent, leaf
Tree, succulent, stem
Vine, herbaceous
Vine, herbaceous, annual
Vine, herbaceous, dicot
Vine, herbaceous, dicot, annual
Vine, herbaceous, dicot, perennial
Vine, herbaceous, monocot
Vine, herbaceous, monocot, annual
Vine, herbaceous, monocot, perennial
Vine, herbaceous, perennial
Vine, herbaceous, succulent
Vine, herbaceous, succulent, annual
Vine, herbaceous, succulent, perennial
Vine, woody
Vine, woody, deciduous
Vine, woody, deciduous, dicot
Vine, woody, deciduous, monocot
Vine, woody, evergreen
Vine, woody, evergreen, dicot
Vine, woody, evergreen, monocot
Annual Inventory 2005
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
A. Overview
An objective of the inventory is to obtain accurate GPS coordinates for each field grid location.
Coordinates are used to correlate plot information with remotely sensed imagery and data and
in relocating the plot at future inventories. For the collection of GPS coordinates- Alaska PNWFIA uses Magellan SporTrak Pro GPS receivers.
B. When and where to collect readings
For each plot visited, collect a GPS reading that has averaged for at least 3 minutes with an
EPE (estimated position error) of 70 feet or less. Try to collect an adequate set of readings as
soon as the center of subplot 1 is located. If unsuccessful, try again shortly before going to the
next subplot. Success is GPS-generated coordinates based on a reading that has averaged for
at least 3 minutes with < 70 feet EPE. If there is no success at the plot center location, try to
obtain coordinates in an opening or nearby area that gets better satellite coverage. If you can
now successfully meet minimum requirements to collect, then be sure to enter the distance and
azimuth to plot center in the appropriate fields (see GPS Info in the Plot Level Data chapter). If
you are still unsuccessful at getting good coordinates near the plot center, then collect them at
one of the other three subplot centers and note accordingly.
NOTE: Allow at least 45 min to an hour between readings to allow for different or new satellites
to come into clear view of the receiver. If more than one coordinate is collected, record the
coordinate that is closest to subplot 1 center and has averaged for at least 3 minutes. Write any
other collected GPS coordinates or any notes regarding GPS use on the front of the location
record. Record the azimuth and distance from the GPS reading location to the center of subplot
1.
C. Recording GPS information
GPS information is recorded in the field data recorder (See GPS INFO in the PLOT LEVEL
DATA section of manual). The following info is put in the data recorder:
GPS LOCATION TYPE (Code = #)
GPS UNIT TYPE (Unit = 2)
GPS SERIAL NUMBER (######, located under GPS screen)
COODINATE SYSTEM (Sys = 1)
LATITUDE DEGREES- (##)
LATITUDE MINUTES- (#####)
LONGITUDE DEGREES- (###)
LONGITUDE MINUTES- (#####)
NUMBER OF READINGS (Read = ###)
GPS ERROR (Error = ###)
GPS ELEVATION (Elev. = #####)
AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm = ###) if coordinates collected at PC
enter 000.
DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist = ###) if coordinates collected at PC
enter 000
146
Annual Inventory 2005
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
** Important Note** The data recorder requires that the number of averaged readings be entered.
The Magellan unit does not have a number of readings counter, instead it utilizes a timer. The
timer is displayed on the position screen. It displays in hours/minutes/and seconds. The GPS
receiver collects one reading per second while averaging. To correctly enter the number of
readings in the husky, the time in minutes and seconds must be converted to number of
readings. Since the unit collects 60 readings per minute of averaging crews must remember to
multiply the number of minutes by 60 and then add the number of seconds shown to that figure.
For example, if the Magellan receiver averages for three minutes and twelve seconds it will
display 00:03:12. To convert this to number of readings multiply three minutes by sixty and add
twelve. 3 X 60 = 180 + 12 = 192. Crews would enter 192 in the husky data recorder for Number of
Readings.
D. GPS keypad layout and commands
PWR: (lightbulb) power key turns the unit on and off. To turn the unit on, hit the PWR key,
then the ENTER key
ENTER: (arrow) confirms data entry or menu selections
MENU: (book) provides access to waypoint and setup functions
ESC: (circled x) cancels the operation of the last button pressed
NAV: (sphere) accesses the various navigation screens
GOTO: (stick man) creates a direct route to any waypoint stored in memory, and is used to
MARK a position
IN: (+magnify glass) zooms in the display of the map screen
OUT: (--magnify glass) zooms out the display of the map screen
LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys move the cursor left or right while entering data
UP/DOWN arrow keys move the cursor up and down while entering data or selecting menu
options
Initiate screen backlight: press and hold the PWR key for 2 seconds.
The backlight quickly drains the batteries, so avoid accidentally turning on the backlight.
Note: Adjust screen backlight: after turning the screen backlight on, press and hold the PWR
key for 2 seconds. This will increase the strength of the backlight. Press and hold the PWR
key for 2 seconds again to turn the backlight off.
147
Annual Inventory 2005
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
E. GPS setup options
Listed below are the parameters to be set up before collecting satellite readings. Once these
parameters are set up for the first time they will not need to be reset. Periodically (at least
weekly) the unit should be checked to see that the settings have not been inadvertently
changed.
NAVIGATION SCREENS
The SporTrak has seven navigation screens that can be displayed or turned off. Some screens
must be displayed in order to get coordinate information. Several screen display similar or the
same information and it is recommended that these screens not be displayed.
Turn the unit on and press NAV until the map screen appears. Press MENU and select Setup
by scrolling down until it is highlighted and press the ENTER key. Select Nav Screens by
scrolling down.
Sat Status = On
Compass = On
Large Data = On
Position = On
Road = Off
SETUP UNITS
Press MENU key, use up or down arrow to select Setup option, then press the ENTER key to
enter the Setup pages. To scroll through the following pages use the up/down arrows. Once
the desired Setup menu option is highlighted, press the ENTER key to select it.
COORDINATE SYTEM: Primary = Lat/Lon = DEG/MIN.MMM
MAP DATUM: Primary = NAD83
ELEV MODE; 3D
TIME FORMAT; Local AM/PM, Done
NAV UNITS: Miles/Ft/MPH
148
Annual Inventory 2005
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
NORTH REFERENCE: Magnetic
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS: United States
POWER OFF TIMER: On/Time/30 minutes
LIGHT TIMER: 4 Minutes
BEEPER: Off
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the MAP DATUM being used is the correct DATUM specified
for your area. This is set on the SETUP page. Using a different datum will alter the
coordinates significantly.
CUSTOMIZING NAVIGATION SCREENS
It is important that navigation screens are setup consistently among all units.
Large Data Screen (see picture below):
Press NAV until the Large Data screen displays. Press MENU and select Customize. Press
ENTER and select BEARING and press ENTER. Press ENTER and select DISTANCE press
ENTER. Press ENTER and select HEADING press ENTER. Press ENTER and select SPEED
press ENTER.
Position Screen (see picture, next page):
Press NAV until the Position screen displays. Press MENU, scroll down until Customize is
highlighted, press ENTER. Press ENTER, scroll down and highlight EPE (estimated position
error), press ENTER. Now the EPE will still be displayed while the unit is averaging. Monitor
EPE to ensure that readings are not taken at > 70 feet.
F. Operating the GPS on plot
Carry extra batteries at all times. The two AA-alkaline batteries begin to lose power after
approximately eight hours of use. See Section K. Batteries, for more details.
1. Turn on the GPS unit
2. Check to see if the unit is receiving satellite readings by pressing the NAV key until
the satellite status screen is visible. The satellite status screen shows 2 circles at the top
of the screen, and the horizontal battery status bar at the bottom. If there are 4 vertical
black bars below the 2 circles and above the battery status bar, then the unit is receiving
enough satellites to calculate your position.
149
Annual Inventory 2005
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
3. When the unit has locked onto 4 satellites, push the NAV key until the Position Screen
is displayed. The Position Screen shows the current coordinates and elevation at the top
of the screen. The date, time, and position error are shown in the center of the screen. If
the GPS unit is not receiving satellites, the position error will show “Search”, and the
coordinates shown at the top of the screen will be the last location where the unit was
able to lock onto 4 satellites.
4. In the Position Screen, the EPE (estimated position error) is displayed just above the
trip odometer (In the place of HEADING on the picture below). The GPS receiver will
enter averaging mode anytime it is stationary. To ensure that only readings at plot center
are averaged, from several feet away, slowly move the unit onto plot center and let it
remain stationary in averaging mode for at least three minutes.
Position Screen
5. Mark and Label the waypoint as described in section H. Waypoints (below)
6. Record the coordinates (lat/long), elevation, number of readings, etc under Plot Level
Data (GPS Info) in the data recorder. If the coordinates are recorded at plot center, then
azimuth and distance to plot center will be recorded as zero.
150
Annual Inventory 2005
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
G. Collecting coordinates away from plot center
If you can’t get an adequate set of readings at plot center, you may take readings at another
location, and then record the azimuth and distance to plot center so that someone in the office
can calculate the coordinates at plot center. Take the GPS unit to a location where you will be
able to collect 3 minutes of averaged readings at < 70ft accuracy, and where you will be able to
accurately measure the horizontal distance, azimuth and slope in degrees to plot center. Do not
move to a distance more than 200ft away if you don’t have a laser range finder.
Record the coordinates, elevation, number of readings, azimuth, and distance to plot center
under Plot Data in the data recorder.
H. Waypoints
Creating a waypoint (when coordinates are given)
A waypoint is a fairly precise location that a GPS user may assign a number and/or label to
identify. For Alaska PNW-FIA the location format is Latitude/Longitude. This format requires this
information: Lat degrees- a 2 digit number and Lat minutes – a 5-digit number. Long
degrees– a 3 digit number and Long minutes – a 5-digit number.
To create a new waypoint with given coordinates from existing plot data, turn on the GPS and
then hold down the GOTO button. This will bring up the MARK screen with SAVE highlighted.
Push either the up or down arrow until the Location field is highlighted. Press ENTER. Highlight
Latitude and press ENTER. Edit line 1 of the location field by press the up or down arrow until
the desired digit is displayed, then press the right arrow to move to the next digit. When the
coordinates are displayed, press ENTER. Edit line 2 of the location field in the same manner,
and press ENTER. Edit the Elevation field in the same manner, and press ENTER. If you need
to edit the icon, name, or message for a waypoint, use the UP/DOWN arrows to highlight the
field you wish to change and press ENTER. You are then placed in the edit mode. Use the
arrow and ENTER keys to select the icons or letters you wish to use. In naming the waypoint,
add the letters NAV when using given coordinates from the folder data -to distinguish
from real-on-the- ground collected GPS points. After you are finished changing the name or
message, highlight the OK button and press ENTER to return to the MARK screen
When you have entered all the necessary data, highlight the Save button, and press ENTER.
(To navigate to a newly created waypoint –see section I.)
Marking (storing) your current location
Storing the location of a vehicle, RP, or starting point is a good example on how you can use
this feature in the field. Stored waypoints can be useful in approaching locations in a different
way, taking a different route back to the RP, or if you should get lost (see navigating to a
waypoint).
To start, make sure the unit is on and you are receiving good signals. Check the Position
screen (see Section F. Operating the GPS) and be sure that you are getting readings from at
least 4 satellites. Wait until the EPE (estimated position error) is 70 feet or less. Allow it to
collect readings for at least 3 minutes
151
Annual Inventory 2005
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
Push the GOTO button and hold it down until the MARK screen appears. At this point, the
coordinates are “locked in” and you can move the unit around without fear of the coordinates
changing. NOTE: when entering coordinates into the PDR for the PC, RP, LZ, etc., wait until
after you have “marked” the waypoint (don’t read off and enter the coordinates prior to
marking). You can now select a name to assign as a waypoint for your current location. Push
the UP/DOWN arrows until “name” is highlighted, then press ENTER. Use the arrow and
ENTER keys to select the letters or symbols you wish to use. After you are finished changing
the name highlight the OK button and press ENTER to return to the MARK screen. Scroll down
and highlight the save button and press enter.
The GPS’s current location (under the assigned name), is now stored in its memory and can be
used to navigate with.
Naming the GPS Waypoints
The Magellan waypoint name allows us up to 8 numbers/letters/symbols.
The first five digits of the name should be the plot number (on the folder). (ex. if the plot number
is 30 then plot number is 00030). The next 2-3 digits would be LZ, TR, RP, PC, SP2, SP3, SP4,
or OTH.
LZ/TR = landing zone, or truck parking spot
RP = Reference Point
PC = Plot Center
SP2 = Subplot 2
SP3 = Subplot 3
SP4 = Subplot 4
OTH = Other, describe in GPS notes/location record
I. Navigating with the GPS
To begin navigation, you must first have a waypoint stored in the GPS unit (see Section H.
Waypoints). A compass will be needed. (NOTE: keep the compass away from the body of the
GPS to keep it from affecting the magnetic accuracy). Once you know which waypoint number
you are going to travel towards, turn the GPS on and then, after the unit has locked onto 4
satellites, push the GOTO button. Highlight “User” in the menu, and press the right or left arrow
buttons until “Alphabetical” shows in the field under FIND BY at the bottom of the screen. Press
the ENTER button. A list of user-stored waypoints appears. Scroll down through the list until
you find the name or number of the desired waypoint. (For example: a NAV waypoint as created
in Section H) Highlight the desired waypoint and press ENTER.
If you are not getting satellite signals then you will get the bearing and distance to the waypoint
you selected from the last position the GPS unit obtained satellite signals. You may want to
move in the general direction of the waypoint and hope that satellites will come into better view,
or you may want to let the GPS sit for a few minutes to lock on to some signals.
Once you are sure you are receiving satellites you can press the NAV button to find the Large
Data screen. This screen displays the bearing (azimuth) and distance to the waypoint and also
the heading and speed of the GPS receiver. Follow the bearing using a compass, as you walk
towards the waypoint and the distance should steadily decrease. Eventually, as you get closer
to the waypoint, the distance will get very small (about 10-30ft), and the bearing will begin to
152
Annual Inventory 2005
XI. COORDINATES (GPS)
jump around dramatically. This means that you are very close to your destination (so look for
the stake and witness trees if the waypoint is subplot 1).
Other data you might see on the navigation screens:
Bearing This is the direction to your destination from your present position, in degrees, from
North.
Distance This is distance (measured in the Nav Units selected in Setup) to your destination.
Heading This is the direction you are moving (measured in degrees). When the heading and
bearing are the same, you are traveling in a direct line to your destination.
Speed This is the rate that you are traveling. The unit of measure is selected in Setup - Nav
Units.
J. Batteries
GPS machines use two AA batteries, which usually last for eight hours of use. Replace the
batteries when the Power Indicator (found on the bottom of the satellite locator screen) is low.
The GPS may have trouble locating satellites if the battery is low.
NOTES:
153
Annual Inventory 2005
XII. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS
XII. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Overview
Accurate heights are necessary in our inventory in order to determine volume and for other
uses. The Laser can be used to get fast and accurate tree heights. It can also be used to
measure distances and % slope. This instrument is more fragile than the GPS units. Some
precautions must be taken with the Lasers to keep them working properly. These are:
1. Never look at the sun through the scope. Looking directly at the sun can permanently
damage your eyes.
2. Never point the Laser directly at the sun. Exposing the lens system to direct sunlight,
even for a brief period, may permanently damage the laser transmitter.
3. Do not expose the Laser to extreme temperatures. It is rated for a temperature range
of -22 to +140 deg. F. Don’t leave the instrument in the vehicle during the heat of the
day.
4. Do not use batteries with “voltage check” features built on the batteries. The battery
case of the Laser is too narrow for these batteries, and they could get stuck in the
instrument.
5. Do not drop the Laser. Immediately return it to it’s case when you are finished using it.
B. Basic operation
All directions for using the Laser buttons are given assuming you are holding the instrument
with the LCD display screen facing you and the 2 round lenses are facing the object you want
to measure. The buttons will be referred to as:
L1
the left button closest to you
L2
the left button in the middle
L3
the left button furthest away from you
R1
the right button closest to you
R2
the right button in the middle
R3
the right button furthest away from you
Turn the Laser on by pushing L1 or R1
Turn it off by pushing L2 and L3 at the same time. The Laser may turn itself off after a period
of inactivity. Once the instrument is on, push the R1 button to make the red dot appear in the
sighting scope. If there is no red sighting dot, repeatedly push the L2 button until the red dot
appears and is the correct brightness.
To light up the display screen, press L3. Press L3 again to turn off the light.
C. Settings
Make sure the settings are correct before using the Laser. To set the correct measurement
units, go into the main menu and:
1. Press R2 or R3 to scroll through the menu until SYS is displayed in the upper right hand
corner of the screen.
2. Press R1. ON or OFF will show in the center of the screen. FILTER will flash at the
bottom.
3. Press R2 until OFFSET is flashing. The number displayed should be 0000.00.
4. Press R2 until PIVOT is flashing. The number displayed should be 0000.59. When this
number is set at 0.00, the Laser is set to calculate heights using a tripod attached to the
center of the instrument. The pivot point is the center of the Laser. We use the pivot value
at 0.59 because this sets the pivot point at the rear of the instrument, and this allows you to
154
Annual Inventory 2005
XII. LASER 200 INSTRUCTIONS
shoot a height while using your head as the pivot point. To change this number, press L1
until the number you want to change is flashing. Press L2 or L3 until the correct number is
showing. When the number is set at 0000.59, press R1.
5. Press R2 until UNITS is flashing. Select F (feet) using the R1 button.
6. Press R2 again and D (degrees) should be flashing. If not, press R1 to toggle on D.
7. Press R2 again and % should be flashing. It should say ON. If not, press R1.
8. Press R3 twice to accept the new settings and back out to the main display.
D. Filter and Reflectors
When you are working in areas of dense brush, you need to make sure the Laser is giving you
the distance to the correct target. The best way to do this is to use a reflector as a target and
use the filter option on the Laser. The Laser will only lock onto the highly reflective targets and
ignore the less reflective brush. To use the filter option:
1. Place a reflector (or have someone hold it) on the tree where it can be seen from the
required distance. The Laser will not work in the filter mode without a reflector as a target.
2. Go to the main menu on the Laser and push R2 or R3 until SYS is displayed on the
screen.
3. Press R1 to select the SYS option. The FILTER option will blink, and it will say the FILTER
is OFF or ON.
4. Push R1 to toggle FILTER between ON and OFF.
5. Press R3 to save the desired setting and to back out into the main display. When the
FILTER is on, FILTER will appear at the bottom of the screen when the Laser is measuring
distances.
E. Distances and % slope
Horizontal distance (HD): Turn the Laser on. The top-middle of the LCD screen will say HD.
Point the red sighting dot at the target. Press R1 and hold it down until the Laser locks on
the target, then release. You can tell when the instrument locks onto it’s target by sound. It
buzzes while it is searching for the target, then beeps when it locks on to a target or there
is an error. If you get an error message, simply aim again and press R1.
Slope distance (SD) and Vertical distance (VD): Push R2 or R3 until the correct display is
shown. Then aim and press R1 until the Laser locks on target. Or, measure a horizontal
distance, then push R2 until the correct display is shown.
% slope: Press R2 or R3 until INC is displayed. Then aim and press R1.
F. Tree heights
The best way to measure a tree height is to make sure you have a clear shot at the leader or a
clear shot of the tree trunk. Make sure you are getting a distance to the tree trunk, and not
some branches in front of it. If you can’t get a clear shot at the leader or the tree trunk, use a
reflector (see section D). Once you are in position with your target in sight, go to the main
menu:
1. Push R2 or R3 until HT is displayed in the upper left of the screen.
2. Push R1 once, aim at the target, then push R1 until the Laser locks on target. This will
measure the horizontal distance.
3. The down arrow will flash. Aim at the base of the tree and push R1 to get the % slope.
4. The up arrow will flash. Aim at the top of the tree and push R1 again to get another %
slope.
5. Press R1 once more and the Laser will display the height. Make sure this height is
reasonable before recording it in the Husky.
155
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
XIII. APPENDICES
Table of Contents
Appendix 1--Radio Information…………………………………….158
Appendix 2--Metric Equivalents……………………………………165
Appendix 3--Slope Correction Table………………………………167
Appendix 4--Determination of Stocking
Values for Land Use Classification………………...168
Appendix 5--Glossary………………………………………………...172
Appendix 6--Cubic Foot Volume Table……………………………177
Appendix 7--Forms……………………………………………………178
157
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Appendix 1-- Radio Information
Radio communications for the 2005 season includes repeaters that extend from Ketchikan to
the Kenai Penninsula, it is very important that crew leaders keep up to date with the frequencies
(by group) that are available in the immediate vicinity of the boat. There will be briefings (usually
daily) discuussing radio (repeater) coverage information, it is important that all personnel be
trained up in radio usage and that everyone keep track of current radio (repeater) coverage.
REMEMBER: if radio communication is not possible, the satellite phone is a good alternative.
To change groups in the radio do the following: press # , then 01 (for group 01, insert group
number that is to become active, 02, 03, 04,…etc), then ENT. Verify that you are in the right
group by looking at the LCD screen (under the plastic cover)
Use the blank tables below for any special frequencies or any other specific user information
that you want to track
Radio Information
Channel RX Freq
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
TX Freq
TX CG
Phone Number Information
Phone Type
Phone Number
Repeater
Person
The next pages include repeater location maps and frequency lists for all the channel groups
that will be pre-installed on the field going radios.
158
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
159
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
CHANNEL GROUP 1
GROUP DISPLAY NAME
SITKA/HOONAH AREA
SIT/HNH
Channel
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
RXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Receive
156.800
168.675
168.725
168.675
168.725
168.725
168.725
168.675
168.675
168.675
170.125
168.725
162.550
163.100
Transmit
156.800
171.475
168.725
168.675
171.575
171.575
171.575
171.475
171.475
171.475
170.125
171.575
0.000
163.100
TXCG
0.0
100.0
141.3
141.3
123.0
114.8
136.5
136.5
123.0
114.8
123.0
100.0
0.0
0.0
NAME
MARINE16
PORT RPT
N KRUZOF
MUD BAY
NEKA
SEAL
STEELHD
BIORKA
MOORE MT
FURUHELM
CREWNET
ROBERT B
WEATHER
CREWNET
NB/WB
WB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WB
NB
TXCG
0.0
114.8
88.5
100.0
123.0
114.8
77.0
71.9
123.0
114.8
123.0
100.0
0.0
0.0
NAME
WEATHER
WINDFALL
AUKE MT
PORT RPT
WILHENRY
SEAL
TAKU
BEEZER
MOORE MT
FURUHELM
CREWNET
ROBERT B
MARINE16
CREWNET
NB/WB
WB
NB
NB***
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WB
NB
Narrow Band (NB) = 12.5 Khz analog channel
Wide Band (WB) = 25 Khz analog channel
CHANNEL GROUP 2
JUNEAU AREA
GROUP DISPLAY NAME
JUNEAU
Channel
CH1
CH2
CH3***
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
Receive
162.550
169.100
170.150
169.100
169.100
168.725
169.100
169.100
168.675
168.675
170.125
168.725
156.800
163.100
RXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Transmit
0.000
170.150
169.100
170.150
170.150
171.575
170.150
170.150
171.475
171.475
170.125
171.575
156.800
163.100
*** AUKE MT – Change in July 2005 to: Receive:169.100 Transmit: 170.150, TXCG: 88.5
160
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
CHANNEL GROUP 3 YAKUTAT AREA
GROUP DISPLAY NAME YAKUTAT
Channel
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
Receive
163.100
169.100
169.100
169.100
166.750
166.300
166.900
155.160
156.800
155.400
170.125
169.100
162.400
163.100
RXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Transmit
163.100
169.100
170.150
170.150
168.575
168.225
164.750
155.160
156.800
150.775
170.125
170.150
0.000
163.100
TXCG
123.0
123.0
103.5
82.5
100.0
100.0
100.0
0.0
0.0
100.0
123.0
136.5
0.0
0.0
NAME
GND AIR
YRD LCL
AKWE
MT LAKE
DRY BAY
TERRACE
ICY BAY
YAK EMS
MARINE16
YAK 911
CREWNET
PORT RPT
WEATHER
CREWNET
NB/WB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WB
WB
WB
NB
NB
WB
NB
NOTE: Occasionally there will be more than one CREWNET listed in any given channel
group, This is to keep channel assignments consistent with what the local FS user radios will
have in their program (in cases of joint emergency cooperation). For FIA uses, the
CREWNET located in the channel 14 slot will be used for helicopter operations (line of sight)
and as conditions permit calls to the boat.
CHANNEL GROUP 4
GROUP DISPLAY NAME
STIKINE
Channel
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
Receive
169.175
169.875
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.125
169.150
168.675
162.400
156.800
163.100
STIKINE AREA PETERSBURG
PETERSB
RXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Transmit
169.175
169.875
169.900
169.900
169.900
169.900
169.900
169.900
168.175
168.150
171.475
0.000
156.800
163.100
161
TXCG
123.0
0.0
103.5
110.9
131.8
136.5
146.2
156.7
136.5
114.8
114.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
NAME
LNDNBRG
CREWNET
ETOLIN
KUIU
FOOLS
FARRAGUT
ELBOW
TYEE
RED BAY
BURNETT
FURUHELM
WEATHER
MARINE16
CREWNET
NB/WB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WB
WB
NB
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
CHANNEL GROUP 5
KETCHIKAN POW AREA
GROUP DISPLAY NAME
KET POW
Channel
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
Receive
169.125
169.125
169.125
169.125
169.125
169.125
169.125
169.125
169.150
169.150
162.550
156.800
157.100
163.100
RXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
CHANNEL GROUP 6
GROUP NAME
Channel
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
Receive
169.150
169.150
169.150
169.150
169.150
169.150
169.150
169.150
169.125
169.125
162.550
156.800
157.100
163.100
Transmit
169.125
168.175
168.175
168.175
168.175
168.175
168.175
168.175
169.150
168.150
0.000
156.800
157.100
163.100
TXCG
100.0
114.8
123.0
136.5
151.4
167.9
186.2
203.5
100.0
114.8
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
NAME
POW LCL
12 MILE
TWIN PKS
RED BAY
POLK
BOKAN
PORT-1
PORT-2
REV LCL
BURNETT
WX-1
MARINE16
MARINE22
CREWNET
NB/WB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WB
WB
WB
NB
KETCHIKAN REVILLA AREA
KET/REV
RXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Transmit
169.150
168.150
168.150
168.150
168.150
168.150
168.150
168.150
169.125
168.175
0.000
156.800
157.100
163.100
162
TXCG
100.0
114.8
123.0
136.5
151.4
167.9
186.2
203.5
100.0
123.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
NAME
REV LCL
BURNETT
ORCHARD
BOCA
PUNCHBWL
HIGH MTN
BLACK MTN
PORT
POW LCL
TWIN PKS
WX-1
MARINE16
MARINE22
CREWNET
NB/WB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WB
WB
WB
NB
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
CHANNEL GROUP 7
GROUP NAME
Channel
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CHUGACH AREA
CHUGACH
Receive
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.175
169.125
162.550
156.800
157.100
RXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Transmit
169.175
169.975
169.975
169.975
169.975
169.975
169.975
169.975
169.125
0.000
156.800
157.100
TXCG
0.0
110.9
123.0
131.8
136.5
146.2
156.7
167.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
163.100
0.0
163.100
0.0
NAME
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
CH 5
CH 6
CH 7
CH 8
CREW NET
WEATHER
MARINE16
MARINE22
EMPTY
CREWNET
NB/WB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
NB
WB
WB
WB
NB
NOTE: Chugach dispatch uses channel number (as opposed to using repeater locations
[Tongass]) when identifying which repeater is being used. Use the Chagach repeater map as
a guide for which repeater(s) are best to use for your location.
CHANNEL GROUP 8
GROUP DISPLAY NAME
MARINE CHANNELS
MARINE
Channel
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
CH 5
CH 6
CH 7
CH 8
CH 9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
RXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Receive
156.800
157.100
156.050
156.300
156.350
156.450
156.500
156.600
156.650
156.375
156.425
156.475
156.575
163.100
Transmit
156.800
157.100
156.050
156.300
156.350
156.450
156.500
156.600
156.650
156.375
156.425
156.475
156.575
163.100
163
TXCG
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
NAME
MARINE16
MARINE22
MARINE01
MARINE06
MARINE07
MARINE09
MARINE10
MARINE12
MARINE13
MARINE67
MARINE68
MARINE69
MARINE71
CREWNET
NB/WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
WB
NB
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
164
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Appendix 2 -- Metric Equivalents
Length
1 inch
0.1 feet
1 foot
1 mile
1 centimeter (cm.)
1 meter (m.)
=
=
=
=
2.54 centimeters (cm.)
3.048 centimeters (cm.)
0.3048 meter (m.)
1.609 kilometers (km.)
= .03 foot (ft.)
= 3.2808 feet (ft.)
Area
1 acre
5 acres
1,000 acres
1 hectare
2.5 hectares
=
=
=
=
=
0.4 hectare (ha.) (approximately)
2 hectares (ha.) (approximately)
404.7 hectares (ha.)
2.471 acres (ac.)
6 acres (ac.) (approximately)
Condition class minimum area
0.4 hectares (1 acre)
1 acre
= 4,000 square meters
= 40 meters x 100 meters
= 35 meter radius circle
= 118 foot radius circle
= 209 feet x 209 feet
= 43,560 square feet
Basal Area Factor
Metric units: each selected tree represents XX square meters of basal area per ha.
English units: each selected tree represents XX square feet of basal area per acre.
English
15
20
30.5
30
Metric
3.44
4.59
7
6.88
165
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Metric System-length
1 meter
1 meter
1 meter
= 10 decimeters (dm.)
= 100 centimeters (cm.)
= 1,000 millimeters (mm.)
and:
.001 meters
.01 meters
.1 meters
1 meter
10 meters
100 meters
1,000 meters
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1 millimeter
1 centimeter
1 decimeter
1 meter
1 decameter
1 hectometer
1 kilometer
Photo Scales
Scale
Length on Photo
Length on Ground
1:15,840
1:24,000
1:31,680
1:40,000
1 mm.
1 mm.
1 mm.
1 mm.
1:15,840
1 inch
1,320 feet
0.1 inch
132 feet
.05 inch (1/20) 66 feet
1:24,000
1 inch
2,000 feet
0.1 inch
200 feet
.05 inch (1/20) 100 feet
1:31,680
1 inch
2,640 feet
0.1 inch
264 feet
.05 inch (1/20) 132 feet
1:40,000
1 inch
3,333 feet
0.1 inch
333 feet
.05 inch (1/20) 166 feet
166
15.8 meters
24.0 meters
31.7 meters
40.0 meters
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Appendix 3-- Slope Correction Table
EXPANSION
-SLOPE
EXPANSION FACTOR
DISTANCEPERCENT FACTOR RECIPROCAL 24.0 ft. 100 ft.
10
15
20
25
30
1.005
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
0.995
0.99
0.98
0.97
0.96
24.1
24.3
24.5
24.7
25.1
100.5
101.1
102.0
103.1
104.4
35
40
45
50
55
1.06
1.08
1.10
1.12
1.14
0.94
0.93
0.91
0.89
0.88
25.4
25.8
26.3
26.8
27.4
105.9
107.7
109.7
111.8
114.1
60
65
70
75
80
1.17
1.19
1.22
1.25
1.28
0.86
0.84
0.82
0.80
0.78
28.0
28.6
29.3
30.0
30.7
116.6
119.3
122.1
125.0
128.1
85
90
95
100
105
1.31
1.35
1.38
1.41
1.45
0.76
0.74
0.72
0.71
0.69
31.5
32.3
33.1
33.9
34.8
131.2
134.5
137.9
141.4
145.0
110
115
120
125
130
1.49
1.52
1.56
1.60
1.64
0.67
0.66
0.64
0.62
0.61
35.7
36.6
37.5
38.4
39.4
148.7
152.4
156.2
160.1
164.0
135
140
145
150
155
1.68
1.72
1.76
1.80
1.84
0.60
0.58
0.57
0.55
0.54
40.3
41.3
42.3
43.3
44.3
168.0
172.0
176.1
180.3
184.5
167
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Appendix 4-- Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use
Classification
Stocking values are required to determine if a CONDITION STATUS = 1 (accessible forest land)
exists on a plot. This will determine which data items must be recorded for the condition. When
the CONDITION STATUS is in question (usually a nonforest area that is in the process of
reverting to forest land or a marginal site that can only support a low number of trees), the crew
must determine if there is sufficient stocking to classify the condition as forest. A minimum
stocking value of 10 percent is required for accessible forest land (unless the condition was
previously forested, such as a recent clear cut).
The following tables show the stocking values to assign to trees to determine if a plot meets the
minimum stocking to be considered forest land. In the determination of stocking for this
purpose, the field crew should consider the condition over its entire area, not just the trees and
seedlings that would be tallied on the subplots and microplots, especially when the plot
straddles conditions. Also, for stocking purposes, consider a clump of trees (e.g., stump
sprouts) less than 5 inches DBH to be a single tree.
Observe all of the trees on the plot and classify the condition, based on the tree with the largest
DBH, into one of the following groups; the largest tree observed has a DBH of 5 inches or
greater, 4.0-4.9 inches, 3.0-3.9 inches, 2.0-2.9 inches, 1.0-1.9 inches or less than 1.0 inch DBH.
If you are using the Stocking Values table to determine if the condition meets minimum stocking,
use tables 5a and 5b (below).
When using a Stocking Values table, begin a tally of each subplot and microplot and sum the
stocking values for each tree tallied based upon its species and size class. When the stocking
values for the tallied trees equals or exceeds 10, the condition meets the minimum stocking
requirement for forest land.
For example, a condition that was formerly nonforest is no longer being maintained as nonforest
and has begun to revert. A check of all four subplots and microplots confirms that the largest
tree there is in the 3.0 – 3.9 inches DBH class. The tally of microplot 1 is one white spruce
(species code = 094) seedling. The sum of the stocking value (table 5a) to this point is 1.8 and
the tally continues on microplot 2.
Subplot
Number
1
Plot Type
2
Species
Size Class
094
< 1.0
Number
Tallied
1
Stocking
Value
1.8
Total
1.8
The tally at microplot 2 is two white spruce seedlings. The stocking value for the two seedlings
is 3.6. The cumulative stocking value to this point is 5.4. Since the minimum value of 10
percent stocking has not been reached, the tally continues to subplot 3.
168
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Subplot
Number
1
2
Plot Type
2
2
Species
Size Class
094
094
< 1.0
< 1.0
Number
Tallied
1
2
Total
Stocking
Value
1.8
3.6
5.4
At microplot 3 two white spruce (species code = 318) saplings in the 1.0 – 1.9-inch DBH class is
tallied. The cumulative stocking value is now 12.8 and the condition meets the minimum
stocking to be considered forest land.
Subplot
Number
1
2
3
Plot Type
2
2
2
Species
Size Class
094
094
094
< 1.0
< 1.0
1.0 – 1.9
Total
Number
Tallied
1
2
2
Stocking
Value
1.8
3.6
7.4
12.8
When trees of more than one diameter class are present, their contribution towards meeting the
minimum must be combined. For example:
In a lodgepole pine stand (species code = 108), the largest tree in the condition is 5.0+
inches DBH. If at least 20 trees that are 5.0-6.9 inches DBH are found on the four
subplots, the minimum stocking of 10 percent (table 5b: 3rd row, 1st column) is met. In the
same condition only 5 tally trees in the 13.0-14.9-inch DBH class are needed to meet
minimum stocking of 10 percent. If the tally were three 5.0-6.9-inch trees and two 13.014.9-inch DBH class trees (total stocking of 3 x 0.5 + 2 x 2.2 = 5.9), the combined
stocking would not meet the minimum 10 percent (5.9 < 10) and the condition would be
classified nonforest.
If there is a transition zone between two conditions use your best judgment to be sure that trees
tallied in the transition zone do not have too much weight in the assignment of a land use
169
5.06.9
0.7
0.7
0.5
0.5
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.2
Species
(019) subalpine fir
(094) white spruce
(095) black spruce
(108) lodgepole pine
(011) Pacific silver fir
(042) AK yellow cedar
(098) Sitka spruce
(231) Pacific yew
(242) western
redcedar
(263) western
hemlock
(264) mountain
hemlock
(351) red alder
(375) paper birch
(746) quaking aspen
(747) black
cottonwood
10.8
10.9
10.5
11.7
4.8
5.0
6.2
6.9
4.04.9
8.1
8.3
7.9
8.8
3.6
3.7
4.7
5.2
6.3
6.4
6.1
6.8
2.8
2.9
3.6
4.0
2.02.9
4.1
4.1
4.0
4.4
1.8
1.9
2.3
2.6
1.01.9
1.8
1.9
1.8
2.0
0.8
0.8
1.1
1.2
Seedling
12.3
12.5
12.0
13.3
5.4
5.7
7.1
7.9
4.04.9
9.8
9.9
9.5
10.6
4.3
4.5
5.6
6.2
3.03.9
4.7
4.8
4.6
5.1
2.1
2.2
2.7
3.0
1.01.9
170
7.2
7.3
7.1
7.9
3.2
3.3
4.2
4.6
2.02.9
DBH of tally tree
DBH of tally tree
3.03.9
4.0-4.9
5.0+
2.2
2.2
2.1
2.4
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.4
Seedling
12.0
12.1
11.6
13.0
5.3
5.5
6.9
7.6
3.03.9
8.9
9.0
8.7
9.6
3.9
4.1
5.1
5.7
2.02.9
5.8
5.9
5.7
6.3
2.6
2.7
3.3
3.7
1.01.9
2.7
2.8
2.7
3.0
1.2
1.3
1.6
1.8
Seedling
DBH of tally tree
3.0-3.9
DBH of the largest tally tree in the condition
Table 5a. Stocking values for all tallied trees on the four subplots and microplots
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
11.6
11.8
11.3
12.6
5.1
5.4
6.7
7.4
2.02.9
7.6
7.8
7.4
8.3
3.4
3.5
4.4
4.9
1.01.9
3.7
3.7
3.6
4.0
1.6
1.7
2.1
2.3
Seedling
DBH of tally tree
2.0-2.9
1.0-1.9
11.3
11.5
11.0
12.3
5.0
5.2
6.5
7.2
1.01.9
5.5
5.6
5.3
5.9
2.4
2.5
3.2
3.5
Seedling
DBH of tally
tree
11.0
11.1
10.7
11.9
4.8
5.1
6.3
7.0
Seedling
Seedling
1.1
0.9
0.9
0.8
1.9
1.9
1.8
2.0
0.7
0.7
0.5
0.5
1.3
1.1
1.2
1.2
(095) black spruce
(108) lodgepole pine
(011) Pacific silver fir
(042) Alaska yellow cedar
(098) Sitka spruce
(231) Pacific yew
(242) western redcedar
(263) western hemlock
(264) mountain hemlock
(351) red alder
(375) paper birch
(746) quaking aspen
(747) black cottonwood
7.08.9
(019) subalpine fir
(094) white spruce
Species
5.06.9
3.0
2.5
3.0
2.6
1.2
1.3
1.1
1.6
9.010.9
4.2
3.2
4.2
3.3
1.6
1.7
1.4
2.1
11.012.9
Table 5b. Stocking values for all trees tallied on the subplot only
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
171
5.6
4.0
5.6
4.1
2.1
2.2
1.6
2.6
13.014.9
7.2
4.9
7.2
5.0
2.6
2.8
1.9
3.2
15.016.9
8.9
5.8
9.0
5.9
3.2
3.4
2.1
3.8
17.018.9
10.9
6.8
11.0
6.8
3.8
4.1
2.4
4.4
19.020.9
13.0
7.8
13.1
7.8
4.5
4.8
2.6
5.1
21.022.9
15.2
8.9
15.5
8.9
5.2
5.6
2.9
5.8
23.024.9
17.7
10.0
18.0
9.9
5.9
6.4
3.1
6.5
25.026.9
20.3
11.1
20.7
11.0
6.7
7.3
3.4
7.2
27.028.9
23.1
12.3
23.6
12.1
7.5
8.2
3.6
8.0
29.0+
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Appendix 5-- Glossary
Accessible Forest Land – Land that is within sampled area (the population of interest), is
accessible and can safely be visited, and meets the following criteria:
(a) the condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees (appendix 3) of any size or has been
at least 10-percent stocked in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to
nonforest use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession such as regular
mowing, grazing, or recreation activities, or
ACTUAL LENGTH – For trees with broken or missing tops. The actual length of the tree is
recorded to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground level to the highest remaining portion of the tree
still present and attached to the bole. If the top is intact, this item may be omitted. Forked trees
should be treated the same as unforked trees.
Agricultural Land – Land managed for crops, pasture, or other agricultural use. Evidence
includes geometric field and road patterns, fencing, and the traces produced by livestock or
mechanized equipment. The area must be at least 1.0 acre in size and 120.0 feet. wide at the
point of occurrence.
ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES – Indicates the predominant species that is planted or
seeded in an artificially regenerated condition.
Blind check – a re-installation done by a qualified inspection crew without production crew data
on hand; a full re-installation of the plot for the purpose of obtaining a measure of data quality.
The two data sets are maintained separately. Discrepancies between the two sets of data are
not reconciled. Blind checks are done on production plots only.
Bole – The main stem of a tree, extending from one foot above the ground to the point on the
tree where DOB reaches 4 inches
Boundary – The intersection of two or more conditions on a subplot or microplot. Each
boundary is described by recording the azimuth and horizontal distance from the subplot or
microplot center to the left and right points of where the boundary intersects the perimeter of the
subplot or microplot. An azimuth and distance to a corner point may also be described, if one
exists. If multiple boundaries exist at a subplot, they are recorded in the order of their
occurrence on the subplot, starting from north and proceeding around the compass.
Census Water – Rivers, streams, canals, etc., that are more than 200 feet wide and Lakes,
reservoirs, ponds and similar bodies of water that are greater than 4.5 acres in size.
Certification plot – a plot installed by a certification candidate. It may be a training plot or a
production plot. The candidate working alone installs the plot.
Cold check – an inspection done either as part of the training process, or as part of the ongoing
QC program. Normally the installation crew is not present at the time of inspection. The
inspector has the completed data in-hand at the time of inspection. The inspection can include
the whole plot or a subset of the plot. Discrepancies between the two sets of data may be
reconciled. Cold checks are done on production plots only.
172
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
CONDITION CLASS – The combination of discrete landscape and forest attributes that identify
and define different strata on the plot. Examples of such attributes include condition status,
forest type, stand origin, stand size, owner group, reserve status and stand density.
Cropland – Land under cultivation within the past 24 months, including orchards and land in soil
improving crops, but excluding land cultivated in developing improved pasture.
CROWN CLASS – A classification of trees based on dominance in relation to adjacent trees
within the stand as indicated by crown development and the amount of sunlight received from
above and sides.
Cull – Portions of a tree that are unusable for industrial wood products because of rot, form, or
other defect.
Diameter at Breast Height (DBH) – The diameter of the bole of a tree at breast height (4.5 feet
above the ground), measured outside of the bark.
Diameter Outside Bark (DOB) – A diameter that may be taken at various points on a tree, or
log, outside of the bark. Diameter Outside Bark is often estimated.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) – A unique code identifying U.S. States and
counties (or units in Alaska).
Forest Industry Land – Land owned by companies or individuals that operate wood-using
plants.
Forest Trees – Plants having a well-developed, woody stem and usually more than 12 feet in
height at maturity.
FOREST TYPE – A classification of forest land based upon the trees or tree communities that
constitute the majority of stocking on the site.
Hot check – an inspection normally done as part of the training process. The inspector is
present on the plot with the trainee and provides immediate feedback regarding data quality.
Data errors are corrected. Hot checks can be done on training plots or production plots.
Idle Farmland -- Former cropland or pasture that has not been tended within the last 2 years
and that has less than 10 percent stocking with live trees.
Improved Pasture -- Land that is currently maintained and used for grazing. Evidence of
maintenance, besides the degree of grazing, includes condition of fencing, presence of stock
ponds, periodic brush removal, seeding, irrigation, or mowing.
Inclusion – An area that would generally would be recognized as a separate condition, except
that it is not large enough to qualify. For example, a ½ acre pond within a forested stand.
Industrial Wood – All roundwood products, except firewood.
173
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Inspection crew – a crew of qualified QC/QA individuals whose primary responsibility is the
training, certification and inspection of production crews.
Land Area – As defined by the Bureau of the Census: The area of dry land and land temporarily
or partially covered by water such as marshes, swamps, and river flood plains (omitting tidal
flats below mean tide); streams, sloughs, estuaries and canals less than 200 feet in width, and
ponds less than 4.5 acres in area.
Maintained Road – Any road, hard topped or other surfaces, that is plowed or graded
periodically and capable of use by a large vehicle. Rights-of-way that are cut or treated to limit
herbaceous growth are included in this area.
Marsh – Low, wet areas characterized by heavy growth of weeds and grasses and an absence
of trees.
Measurement Quality Objective (MQO) – Describes the acceptable tolerance for each data
element. MQOs consist of two parts: a statement of the tolerance and a percentage of time
when the collected data are required to be within tolerance.
Merchantable Top – The point on the bole of trees above which merchantable material cannot
be produced. Merchantable top is 4.0 inches for all species.
Microplot – A circular, fixed-radius plot with a radius of 6.8 feet that is used to sample trees less
than 5.0 inches at DBH, as well as other vegetation.
National Forest Land – Federal lands which have been legally designated as National Forests
or purchase units, and other lands under the administration of the Forest Service, including
experimental areas and Bankhead-Jones Title III lands.
Native American (Indian) Land – Tribal lands held in fee, or trust, by the Federal government
but administered for Indian tribal groups and Indian trust allotments. This land is considered
“Private Lands”, Owner Group 40.
Non-census Water – Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water from 1 to 4.5 acres
in size and rivers, streams, canals, etc., from 30 feet to 200 feet in width.
Nonforest Land -- Land that does not support, or has never supported, forests, and lands
formerly forested where use for timber management is precluded by development for other
uses. Includes areas used for crops, improved pasture, residential areas, city parks, improved
roads of any width and adjoining rights-of-way, power line clearings of any width, and
noncensus water. If intermingled in forest areas, unimproved roads and nonforest strips must
be more than 120.0 feet wide, and clearings, etc., more than one acre in size, to qualify as
nonforest land.
Nonstockable – Areas of forest land that are not capable of supporting trees because of the
presence of rock, water, etc.
Other Federal Lands – Federal land other than National Forests. These include lands
administered by the USDI Bureau of Land Management, USDI National Park Service, USDI Fish
174
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
and Wildlife Service, Department of Defense, Department of Energy, Army Corps of Engineers,
and military bases.
OWNER CLASS -- A variable that classifies land into fine categories of ownership.
OWNER GROUP – A variable that classifies land into broad categories of ownership; Forest
Service, Other Federal Agency, State and Local Government, and Private. Differing categories
of Owner Group on a plot require different conditions.
Phase 1 (P1) – FIA activities done as part of remote-sensing and/or aerial photography.
Phase 2 (P2) – FIA activities done on the network of ground plots formerly known as FIA plots.
Phase 3 (P3) – FIA activities done on a subset of Phase 2 plots formerly known as Forest
Health Monitoring plots. Additional ecological indicator information is collected from Phase 3
plots.
Plot – A cluster of four subplots that samples approximately 1/6 acre. The subplots are
established so that subplot 1 is centered within the sample and the centers of subplots 2, 3,and
4 are located 120.0 feet from the center of subplot 1 at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees,
respectively. Each subplot has an associated microplot and annular plot
Plurality - a majority, for example; if there are three tree species distributed throughout a
condition, the species with the majority of stocking in the condition would be considered the
FOREST TYPE species for that condition.
PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS – Indicates whether Private land owners own and
operate a wood processing plant.
Production crew – a crew containing at least one certified individual. The crew is involved in
routine installation of plots.
Production plot – a plot that belongs to the 6000-acre grid database. It may also be used for
training purposes.
REGENERATION STATUS – A stand descriptor that indicates whether a stand has been
naturally or artificially regenerated.
Reserved Land – Land that is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law.
RESERVE STATUS – An indication of whether the land in a condition has been reserved.
Saplings – Live trees 1.0 to 4.9 inches DBH.
Seedlings – Live trees less than 1.0 DBH that are at least one foot tall.
STAND AGE – A stand descriptor that indicates the average age of the live trees not
overtopped in the predominant stand size-class of a condition.
175
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
STAND DENSITY – A stand descriptor that indicates the relative tree density of a condition
class. The classification is based on the number of stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or
stocking of all live trees in the condition which are not overtopped, compared to any previously
defined condition class tree density.
STAND SIZE – A stand descriptor that indicates which size-class of trees that are not
overtopped constitutes the majority of stocking in the stand.
State, County and Municipal Lands – Lands owned by states, counties, and local public
agencies or municipalities, or lands leased to these government units for 50 years or more.
Stocking – The relative degree of occupancy land by trees, measured as basal area or the
number of trees in a stand by size or age and spacing, compared to the basal area or number of
trees required to fully utilize the growth potential of the land; that is, the stocking standard.
Subplot – A circular, fixed-area plot with a radius of 24.0 feet. Each subplot represents ¼ of the
fixed plot sample unit.
TOTAL LENGTH – The total length of the tree, recorded to the nearest 1.0 foot from ground
level to the tip of the apical meristem. For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side
of the tree. If the tree has a broken or missing top, the total length is estimated to what the
length would be if there were no missing or broken top. Forked trees should be treated the
same as unforked trees
Training plot – a plot established for training or certification purposes only. It does NOT belong
to the 6000-acre grid database.
Transition Zone – An area where a distinct boundary between two or more different conditions
cannot be determined.
NOTES:
176
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Appendix 6--Cubic Foot Volume Table
Tree Height (logs)
PERCENT DISTRIBUTION OF CUBIC FOOT VOLUME
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
0.5
52
44
36
31
27
25
22
20
19
18
17
15
14
1
43
36
29
26
22
20
18
17
15
14
13
13
12
1.5
15
17
17
17
15
14
14
13
12
11
11
11
Log Postion (volume/ 8ft. section)
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
14
13
13
13
12
11
10
10
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
10
10
9
9
9
8
8
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
6
7
8
8
8
7
7
7
1 Log = 16 feet
0.5 Log = 8 feet
177
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
4.5
5
5.5
6
6.5
7
4
5
6
6
6
6
4
5
5
5
5
3
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Appendix 7--Forms
PLOT LEVEL DATA FORM
STATE: ____________
Item#
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
PLOT # ________________
Description
QA STATUS
PLOT ATTRIBUTES
AK SAMPLE KIND
AK DATA SOURCE
PLOT STATUS
PLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (Plot Nons Rsn)
CONDITION CLASS STATUS 1 (CC1 Status)
NonS Land Cvr
PREVIOUS PLOT NUMBER (Prev Plt Num)
AK START DATE
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD
WATER ON PLOT (Water Plot)
CREW TYPE
AK CREW LEADER (Crew Lead)
AK CREW MEMBER NAME 1
AK CREW MEMBER NAME 2
AK CREW MEMBER NAME 3
AK CREW MEMBER NAME 4
AK CREW MEMBER NAME 5
AK Landowner plot summary request (Own Request)
AK END DATE
AK P2/P3 PLOT TYPE
PLOT LEVEL NOTES
DOWNLOADED INFO (Not to be updated)
AK OLD LOCATION ID (Old Loc ID)
DATE OF PREVIOUS INVENTORY
FIELD GUIDE VERSION (Core Man Ver)
PDR VERSION
GPS INFO
AK GPS LOCATION TYPE (L)
.
GPS UNIT TYPE (T)
.
GPS SERIAL NUMBER (ID/Ser#)
......
COORDINATE SYSTEM (C)
.
AK GPS LATITUDE DEGREES (Lt)
..
AK GPS LATITUDE MINUTES
.....
AK GPS LONGITUDE DEGREES (Long)
...
AK GPS LONGITUDE MINUTES
.....
NUMBER OF READINGS (Num)
...
GPS ERROR (Err)
...
GPS ELEVATION (Elevat)
......
AZIMUTH TO PLOT CENTER (Azm)
...
DISTANCE TO PLOT CENTER (Dist)
...
AK GPS NOTES
RP INFO
AK RP TYPE
AK RP SPECIES (Spc)
AK RP DIAMETER (Diam)
AK RP AZIMUTH (Azm)
AK RP HORIZONTAL DISTANCE (Dist)
AK RP AZ/DIST TO SUBPLOT # (S)
AK RP NOTES
178
DATE ____/____/____
.
.
.
.
..
.
...
.....
. ./. ./. . . .
.
.
.
.
. ./. ./. . . .
.
.......
. ./. ./. . . .
..
...
.
.
......
.
..
.....
...
.....
...
...
......
...
...
.
...
...
...
....
.
.
.
......
.
..
.....
...
.....
...
...
......
...
...
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
CONDITION CLASS DATA FORM
PLOT # ________________
DATE ____/____/____
1
CONDITION CLASS NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
CONDITION CLASS STATUS
.
.
.
.
.
.
3
CONDITION NONSAMPLED REASON
...
...
...
...
...
...
4
AK estimated non-sample land cover type
..
..
..
..
..
..
5
RESERVED STATUS
.
.
.
.
.
.
6
OWNER GROUP
..
..
..
..
..
..
7
FOREST TYPE
...
...
...
...
...
...
8
STAND SIZE CLASS
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
REGENERATION STATUS
.
.
.
.
.
.
10
TREE DENSITY
.
.
.
.
.
.
ANCILLARY (Non-delineating) VARIABLES
11
OWNER CLASS
..
..
..
..
..
..
12
ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION STATUS
...
...
...
...
...
...
13
STAND AGE
...
...
...
...
...
...
14
DISTURBANCE
..
..
..
..
..
..
15
DISTURBANCE YEAR 1
....
....
....
....
....
....
16
DISTURBANCE 2
....
....
....
....
....
....
17
DISTURBANCE YEAR 2
..
..
..
..
..
..
18
DISTURBANCE 3
....
....
....
....
....
....
19
DISTURBANCE YEAR 3
..
..
..
..
..
..
20
TREATMENT 1
..
..
..
..
..
..
21
TREATMENT YEAR 1
....
....
....
....
....
....
22
TREATMENT 2
..
..
..
..
23
TREATMENT YEAR 2
24
TREATMENT 3
25
TREATMENT YEAR 3
26
27
..
..
....
....
....
....
....
....
..
..
..
..
..
..
....
....
....
....
....
....
PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS
..
..
..
..
..
..
AK PRESENT NON-FOREST LAND USE
..
..
..
..
..
..
28 AK Condition Class Notes-
179
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
SUBPLOT INFORMATION DATA FORM
PLOT # ________________
DATE ____/____/____
1 SUBPLOT #
SUBPLOT ATTRIBUTES
2
SUBPLOT PLOT STATUS (Subplt Status)
3 SUBPLOT NONSAMPLED REASON (NonS Reason)
4 AK estimated nonsample land cover type (NonS Land Cvr)
5
SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION
6 MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION (Microplot Cond)
7
SUBPLOT SLOPE (Slope)
8
SUBPLOT ASPECT (Aspect)
9
SNOW/WATER DEPTH (Snow/Water Dept)
10 P3 POINT STATUS
11 AK SUBPLOT NOTESSUBPLOT MAPPING/BOUNDARY DATA
1
SUBPLOT NUMBER
2
PLOT TYPE (P)
3
AK BOUNDARY CHANGE (B)
4
CONTRASTING CONDITION (C)
5
LEFT AZIMUTH (LAzm)
6
RIGHT AZIMUTH (RAzm)
7
CORNER AZIMUTH (CAzm)
8
CORNER DISTANCE (CDist)
9
AK BOUNDARY NOTES
SEEDLING DATA
1
SUBPLOT NUMBER
2
SPECIES
3
CONDITION CLASS NUMBER
SUBPLOT # Æ
4 AK seedling count, length class 1
Species:
1
2
3
4
.
.
...
.
.
...
...
..
.
.
.
...
.
.
...
...
..
.
.
.
...
.
.
...
...
..
.
.
.
...
.
.
...
...
..
.
.
.
.
.
...
...
...
..
.
.
.
.
...
...
...
..
.
.
.
.
...
...
...
..
.
.
.
.
...
...
...
..
.
...
.
.
...
.
.
...
.
CC1
1
CC2
CC3
CC1
2
CC2
CC3
CC1
.
...
.
3
CC2 CC3
CC1
4
CC2
CC3
5
AK seedling count, length class 2
Species:
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
6
AK seedling count, length class 3
Species:
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
7
AK seedling count, length class 4
Species:
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC1
CC2
CC3
8
AK seedling notes-
180
1
x
Tree Notes:
2
xxx
Subplot number
3
x
4
x
5
x
6
x
7
x
8
x
9
xxx
PLOT # ________________
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
Tree Record Number
Condition Class Number
Previous Tree Status
Present Tree Status
Subplot Witness Flag
Standing Dead
AK Reconcile
AK Previous Species
10
xxx
Species
11
xxx
AK Previous AZ
13
xx.y
Azimuth
12
xxx
14
xx.y
15
xx.y
181
16
xxx
17
xxx.y
18
x
19
xxx
TREE AND SAPLING DATA FORM
DATE ____/____/____
AK previous HD
Horizontal Distance
AK Slope dist. to wit.
AK previous dbh.
Diameter
Diameter Check
AK 10-YR Increment
20
xxx
Actual Length
21
x
AK Length Method
22
xxx
Total Length
23
xx
Compacted Crown
Ratio
24
x
25
xx
26
x
27
x
28
xxxx
PAGE ____ OF____
Crown Class
Rotten/Missing Cull
AK tree class
Decay class
AK Mortality Year
29
xx
AK Cause of Death
30
Tree Notes
Annual Inventory of Coastal Alaska Location Record
Annual Inventory 2005
XIII. APPENDICES
PLOT NUMBER:
START DATE:
CREW LEADER:
/
/
END DATE:
/
/
CREW MEMBERS:
RP DATA
RP LOCATION AND TRAVEL DESCRIPTION:
Species
Diameter
in.
Azimuth
Horiz dist.
ft.
To subplot
PRESENT CONDITION / PAST DISTURBANCE
LOCATION CHECKLIST:
___ Monumentation
(RP, all witnesses)
___ GPS coordinates collected
(LZ, RP, PC)
___ Photo work
(Pinprick, data on reverse)
___ Plot level data
P3 Checklist
LOCATION SKETCH MAP:
___Vegetation
N
2
___ Lichens
___ DWM
___ Crowns
___ Condition Class
___ Subplot Info
(Invasives, mapping, & seedlings)
___ Tree Record
(Tree & Sapling)
___ Site Trees
(3 site/age per species, per condition)
1
4
QA Reviewer:
Date:
182
3